Instrucciones de Mantto

ISTRUZIONI PER IL MONTAGGIO E LA MANUTENZIONE
ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
COMMESSA N.
JOB N. : 8239829-8239830-8239831
ORDINE N.
ORDER N. : 2845077
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone DT-'N'

CLIENTE
CUSTOMER : PEMEX EXPLORACION Y PRODUCCION
LOCALITA’ IMPIANTO
PLANT LOCATION : MEXICO
PLANT
IMPIANTO : AKAL C7
TITLE DOCUMENT CODE REVISION

NOM0102127 0
REVISION DESCRIPTION: APPROVED Stanzione V.
ISSUE - EMISSION DATE SECURITY CODE
CHECKED Cappiello T.
06-Mar-12 N
EXECUTED ESP
SCALE REPLACES/DERIVED FROM 1st ISSUE ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
N/A N/A 06-Mar-12 8239829 4 I/A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF NUOVO PIGNONE S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUOVO PIGNONE S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 NUOVO PIGNONE S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 1 of 2
INDICE / INDEX
Tipo Tipo Tipo Codice manuale / Manual code
Sigla Matricola Valvola Attuatore Baderna SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4
Tag Serial N. Valve Actuator Packing Valvola Baderna Attuatore Accessori
type Rev Rev Rev
type type Valve Packing Actuator Accessories
FV4205A/ 8239829 /
RV 08935 B0180881
Diaphragm 300-301-302-
FV4205B/ 8239830 / 24 DIR. NOM02020/ NOM02059/ NOM02004/ 304-305-306-
ULN/Bi 1 4 5 3
RV 08935 B0180882 with Eng Eng Eng 307-308
LHW (see tab “X”)
FV4205C/ 8239831 /
RV 08935 B0180883
Tab “X”
Accessori Tipo Codice di Riferimento
Accessories Type Reference Code
POSIZIONATORE E/P
300 ABB Mod. TZID-C200 42/18-80 EN
E/P POSITIONER
FILTRO REGOLATORE
301 FISHER Mod. 67 CFSR-1/4” NPT Bulletin 71.1:67C
FILTER REGULATOR
FINECORSA
306 N.2 GO-SWITCH Series 70 Mod. 73 /
LIMIT SWITCH
TRASMETT. DI POSIZIONE INCLUSO NEL POSIZIONATORE
307 /
POSITION TRANSMITTER INCLUDED IN POSITIONER
VALVOLA SOLENOIDE A 3 VIE
302 ASCO Mod. NFB 327 PIC-2-50-GB
3 WAY SOLENOID VALVE
305 BOOSTER FISHER Mod. 2625 62.3:2625
VALVOLA PNEUM. A 3 VIE

304 NORGREN Mod. D1036C-00-A1 /
3 WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE
CASSETTA DI GIUNZIONE
308 CORTEM Mod. CCA-01 /
JUNCTION BOX
TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION

NOM0102127 0
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
ISSUE - EMISSION N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
8239829 4 I/A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF NUOVO PIGNONE S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUOVO PIGNONE S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 NUOVO PIGNONE S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 2 of 2
SECTION 1
VALVE MANUAL
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
SECTION 2
PACKING MANUAL
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
TITOLO - TITLE
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
NOTA INTERNA:
PER LE ALTRE LINGUE VEDERE
NOM0205901
CONTROL VALVES
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'

PACKING ASSEMBLY MANUAL
5 General revision ESP Bucci F. Stanzione V. 30/04/10

4 ESP/MP Bucci F. 03/07/09 COMM. - JOB
Revised sheet 11 /12 Stanzione V.
3 Added packing type 7 ESP/MP Bucci F. ITEM

16/03/09
Stanzione V.
2 General revision ESP Stanzione V. Bucci F. 28/02/08

NOM02059/4
1 General revision DPF/RR Cappiello Cappiello 26/07/06
LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
0 ISSUE DPF/RR Cappiello Cappiello 05/07/05
REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP- APPR'D DATA - DATE A 1 / 2
Il presente documento è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termine di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
INDEX
1. PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4
2. STANDARD PACKING ASSEMBLY (TYPE 1-2-2A-3-4-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3/4
3. GRF PACKING MAINTENANCE (TYPE 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/8
4- GIJ PACKING MAINTENANCE (TYPE 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9/10
5- RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12/12
5 General revision
4 Revised sheet 11 /12 ITEM
3 Added packing type 7

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 2 / 3
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
1. PURPOSE
This procedure describes the assembly stages of Nuovo Pignone control valves
packing.
2. STANDARD PACKING ASSEMBLY (TYPE 1-2-2A-3-4-7)

Assemble the sealing system following the instructions indicated and referring to
the figures.
1) Type 1 Insert the spring /16/, the adapter ring /23/, the seal rings /18/,
the packing gland /19/ and the packing gland flange /20/.
Type 2-2A Place the lower adapter ring /17a/, the seal rings /18/, the other
adapter ring /23/, the spring /22/, the adapter ring /17a/, the seal rings /18/,
the packing gland /19/ and the packing gland flange /20/.
For detail assembly, follow the assembly direction as per figures 2 and 2A.
Type 3 Insert the spacer /24/, the shoulder ring /25/, the seal rings /26/,
the other shoulder ring /25/, the packing gland /19/ and the packing gland
flange /20/.
Type 4 Place the first rings /23/, /25/, /26/, /25/ so as to cover the
lubrication hole on the bonnet and insert the lubricator ring /29/. Compress
the lower seal unit by using an adequate metallic spacer. Then, remove the
metallic spacer and fix the upper seal unit. Assemble the packing gland /19/
and the packing gland flange /20/.
Type 7 Insert the adaptor ring /17/, then the shoulder ring /25/, the seal
rings /26/ and the other shoulder ring /25/. Insert the packing gland /19/, the
cup springs /39/ and the two antirotation washers /37/. Screw the clamp nut
/33/ with the tightening torque indicated in table C.
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Note: for all typologies, the assembly direction must be as shown in the
figure.
2) For standard packing type 1-2-2A-3-4, screw the stud bolts /14/ on the
bonnet /12/ and compress the entire seal unit with the nuts /21/.
21
14
12
STANDARD PACKING TYPE 1-2-2A-3-4
3) For standard packing type 1-2-2A-3-4, make the valve complete its entire
stroke for 5 times or more and check the nuts torque.
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
33
STANDARD PACKING TYPE 7
4) For standard packing type 7, make the valve complete its entire stroke
for 5 times or more and check the clamp nut torque. In case of leak,
check and, if necessary, restore the clamp nut tightening torque as per
table C.
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
14 14 14
21 21 21
19 19 19
18
18 18
23
16 22 22
23 23
18
18
Type 1 Type 2 Type 2A
Upper
seal unit
Lower
seal unit
Type 3 Type 4 Type 7
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
3. GRF PACKING MAINTENANCE (TYPE 5)
20a
Before any operation, make sure that the valve is depressurized.

In case of leak, check and, if necessary, restore the clamp ring tightening
torque as per table A.
If the leak persists, avoid any tampering or disassembly of the seals in order
to prevent any risk for the operator. Contact the Nuovo Pignone technical
assistance.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
TAMPERING MAY BE DANGEROUS FOR THE OPERATOR AND THE VALVE SEALING AREAS
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Table “A”
Tightening torques (Nm) for GRF packing (TYPE 5)
Design STEM DIAMETERS (mm)

Pressure
(Bar) ¯13 ¯20 ¯32
19 85 170 355
50 93 185 385
100 100 200 420
150 103 205 430
200 108 215 445
N.B.: refer to the design pressure indicated on the valve rating plate fixed to
the actuator or to the valve body.
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
4. GIJ PACKING MAINTENANCE (TYPE 6)
Before any operation, make sure that the valve is depressurized.

In case of leak, inject grease DOW CORNING “MOLYKOTE FS 3451” type by
means of a manual pomp equipped with a pressure gauge connected to the
delivery. Grease must be injected at the pressure reported on table B.
If the leak persists, avoid any tampering or disassembly of the seals in order to
prevent any risk for the operator. Contact the Nuovo Pignone technical assistance.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
TAMPERING MAY BE DANGEROUS FOR THE OPERATOR AND THE VALVE SEALING AREAS
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Table “B”
Grease Pressure for GIJ packing (TYPE 6)

Design Grease
Pressure Pressure
(bar) (bar)
19 25
50 30
100 50
150 60
200 70
250 80
420 115
N.B.: refer to the design pressure indicated on the valve rating plate fixed to the
actuator or to the valve body.
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Table “C”
Tightening torques (Nm) for packing TYPE 7
Design STEM DIAMETERS (mm)

Pressure
(Bar) ¯12 ¯18 ¯30 ¯40
19 50 90 370 630
50 55 105 435 745
100 65 128 510 875
150 90 185 600 1010
N.B.: refer to the design pressure indicated on the valve rating plate fixed to
the actuator or to the valve body.
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
5. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS (Ref. Figs. Type 1-2-2A-3-4-7)
When ordering spare parts, always indicate the serial number of the relevant
valve.
For an operating period of 1-2 years and for 1÷4 identical valves, we suggest
keeping the following components in stock:
Mark Name Quantity
18 Sealing rings 1 series

25 Retaining rings 1 series
26 Sealing rings 1 series
5 General revision

NOM02059/4
2 General revision
1 General revision
SECTION 3
ACTUATOR MANUAL
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
TITOLO - TITLE
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
NOTA INTERNA:
PER LE ALTRE LINGUE VEDERE
NOM02000401
PNEUMATIC DIAPHRAGM
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'

ACTUATORS
TYPE 11-13-18-18L-24 direct (air close action)

TYPE 11-13-18-18L-24 reverse (air open action)

COMM. - JOB
3 General revision ESP Bucci F. Stanzione V. 30/04/10 ITEM
2 Additions to ATEX Prescription DPF/RR Bucci F. Giove F. 12/02/07 NOM02004/4

1 General revision DPF/RR Bucci Bucci 26/07/06
0 ISSUE 25/09/00 LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
DPF/CE Cappiello Cappiello
REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP- APPR'D DATA - DATE A 1 / 2
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
INDEX
Atex Prescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4

1. General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/10
1.1. Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9/10
2. Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/10
3. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/11
4. Installation and start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11/12
4.1. Services . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/14
4.2. Setting up and calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14/15
5. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/16
5.1. Replacing the diaphragm and the seal ring /52/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16/17
5.1.1. Actuators with “air close” action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/18
5.1.2. Actuators with “air open” action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/18
5.2. Side manual command maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/20
5.2.1. Side manual command disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/20
5.2.2. Controls, repairs and replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20/21
5.2.3. Side manual command reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20/21
6. Recommended spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22/23
7. Actuator part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23/24
8. Part list for side manual command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28/29
Fig. 1 – Actuator with “air close” action (TYPE 11-13-18)

Fig. 2 – Actuator with “air open” action (TYPE 11-13-18)
Fig. 3 – Actuator with “air close” action (TYPE 18L-24)
Fig. 4 – Actuator with “air open” action (TYPE 18L-24)
Fig. 5 – Side manual command (for actuator TYPE 11-13)
Fig. 6 – Side manual command (for actuator TYPE 18)
Fig. 7 – Side manual command (for actuator TYPE 18L-24)
3 General revision ITEM
2 Additions to ATEX Prescription

NOM02004/4
1 General revision
0 ISSUE LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
ATEX PRESCRIPTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual contains the installation, operation and maintenance instructions of the
pneumatic actuators installed on valves Nuovo Pignone.
Please, read this manual prior to install and start actuators and relevant valves.
Keep this manual in a place easy to reach, so that you can quickly refer to it at any
time, during the operation and maintenance of the actuators.
WARNING
In the interest of safety, the staff assigned to operate and service these actuators
must read the entire content of this manual.
IF INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT OF
PARTS ARE NOT PERFORMED PROPERLY, THEY MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO
PEOPLE AND FAILURES TO THE ACTUATORS, THE VALVES AND THE
SYSTEM.
The instructions contained in this manual do not describe the actuators in detail, nor
do they cover every situation that may arise during installation, operation and
maintenance.
The simple fact of providing this user’s manual does not mean that Nuovo Pignone
takes on the responsibilities for activities carried out by the Customer or by the
Contractors.
Nuovo Pignone’s responsibility is limited to the content of the Terms and Conditions
of the sale contract.
If you need further information or if you meet with problems that are not treated in
detail in this manual, please contact Nuovo Pignone’s Technical Assistance.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
GENERAL SAFETY RULES
The actuators were designed to comply with safety criteria, in accordance with the
project specifications.
The user’s technical knowledge and adequate safety standards are absolutely
necessary to prevent damages to actuators, valves and the environment, and to
avoid hazards.
We have assumed that the user has a safety system already running, based on the
analysis of industrial risks.
Prior to installing, starting or servicing the actuators, we suggest checking that all
risks coming from an actuator with parts under pressure are covered.
It is important to give the due importance to risks coming from:
- Electric power
- Hot liquids
- Hot surfaces
- Parts in relative movement
- Flammable liquids and gases
- Ambient noise
The correct installation and maintenance of any protections is necessary for the safe
operation of the actuators.
Never operate the actuators with the protections removed or excluded.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
MAIN WARNINGS
1. The usage conditions of the actuators and of the relevant valves are reported
in the data sheets of each valve. The materials used were selected for the
project conditions (pressure and temperature). The use of the actuators with
different conditions could jeopardize the safety of people and of the
environment. Do not use the actuators for services different from those for
which they were supplied without previously consulting Nuovo Pignone’s
Technical Assistance.
2. Clearances between moving parts, assigned by Nuovo Pignone, are

consolidated and such as to prevent seizure even in presence of very high
temperatures that cause differentiated thermal expansions. The final user shall
inform Nuovo Pignone on any presence and dimensions of solid particles
carried by the process fluid.
3. The persons in charge of the operation and maintenance of the actuators shall
carefully check and make sure that staff is familiar with this manual. Do not
start any activity without previously consulting this user’s manual.
4. Do not start the actuators if you have not learned yet how they work.
5. Prior to starting the actuators, get ready for a possible emergency stop, when it
becomes necessaries for any kind of malfunctioning.
6. Access to the actuators and their accessories shall be limited to authorized

personnel only, who shall undergo a proper training and wear mandatory
protection equipment.
7. Consult the appropriate instruction manuals of the valve on which the actuator
is installed and of every accessory supplied with the valve.
8. Do not start the actuators and the relevant valves without checking first their
correct installation.
9. Check that the arrow on the valve body, which indicates the direction of the
process fluid (cast or by means of a tag fixed to the valve body) matches the
indications reported in the section and/or overall dimensions drawings.
10. Prior to start valves and actuators, check the alignment between the trim stem
and the actuator stem. If in doubt, consult Nuovo Pignone’s Technical
Assistance.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
11. In presence of flammable fluids, accidental contacts with hot parts could cause
a flame. The user is responsible for implementing precautions against flame
risks.
12. In case of actuators designed to be supplied with fluid fuel, make sure that all
pneumatic connections of the supply line to the actuator and of the output
conveyance line are correctly executed, that there is no fuel spillage to the
outside and that no air or comburent enters the lines and in the actuator.
13. The actuators are not designed to be supplied with flammable and/or explosive
fluids or mixtures. Prior to starting the actuators, make sure that the supply fluid
does not contain flammable or explosive mixtures.
14. Do not start any calibration, repairing, disassembly or modification while the
actuators and/or the valves are operating.
15. Do not perform activities that are not described in this manual. Contact Nuovo
Pignone’s Technical Assistance.
16. Do not replace original stud bolts or screws with others of unknown material of
lower quality.
17. Always use original Nuovo Pignone spare parts. The use of original spare
parts guarantees the benefit deriving from the use of a better material,
compliance with dimensional tolerances and correspondence with project
specifications. The use of non-original spare parts may cause situations of
extreme danger for the operators and the environment.
18. The components of Nuovo Pignone actuators are made using materials
selected from a wide range available on the market. The selection is made
considering the operation conditions (temperature, pressure, process fluid).
Prior to replacing any component, make sure that the spare part corresponds
exactly to that used for the valve.
19. During normal operation, parts of aluminum, magnesium and titanium cannot
come into contact with rusty steel. If some parts are rusty, replace them.
20. The installed actuators do not cause sparkles of mechanical nature. The speed
of mobile components is such as not to cause sparkles.
21. During normal operation and maintenance, current due to cathodic protection is
not required. The final user shall install adequate devices to prevent such risk.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
22. Prior to start any maintenance, make sure that the actuator cannot,
accidentally, start the mobile equipment (for instance, by disconnecting the
supply). We recommend using appropriate safety signals indicating the
condition of valves and actuators (whether are operating or in maintenance).
23. Prior to putting valves and actuators in operation, the user shall check that the
temperature class reported on the tag is compatible with the area where they
are installed.
24. The installer/user is responsible for removing risks due to:

- Stray currents due to cathodic protection of piping,
- Electrostatic discharges, guaranteeing electrical continuity between valve and
piping,
- Lightning,
- Electromagnetic radiations,
- Ionizing radiations,
- Ultrasounds.
25. The actuators are equipped with pressure sealing gaskets to the outside and
with an internal elastic membrane that separates the ambient connected to the
supply line from the ambient with atmospheric pressure or connected to the
output conveyance line. The final user shall periodically check the integrity of
seals and membrane. For actuators supplied with fluid fuel, the final user shall
make sure that, during operation, there is no fuel spillage to the outside and
that no air or comburent enters the lines and in the actuator.
26. This manual contains two risk messages:
CAUTION EXPLOSION RISK

! MESSAGE MESSAGE
The meaning of the previous messages is as follows:
Caution:
Danger may come from the damaging or malfunctioning of the actuators causing
serious damages to staff and environmental conditions.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Explosion:
In presence of explosive atmosphere, risk may come from a malfunctioning of the

actuators and cause an explosion. The hazard assessment analysis was carried
out by Nuovo Pignone, assessed and treated in such a way as to be considered
acceptable in relation to the classification of the area specified in the valves data
sheet.
27.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
THIS MANUAL DOES NOT REPLACE THE MANUALS OF OTHER COMPONENTS

INSTALLED ON THE VALVES AND SUPPLIED BY OTHER MANUFACTURERS.
28. For the operation and the residual risks of valves accessories (positioners,
booster, electrovalves, limit stops, position transmitter, etc), the user shall refer
to the manufacturers’ instructions and manuals.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
There follows a description of the main practical rules for the installation, setting
up, calibration and maintenance of the pneumatic control actuators
manufactured by Nuovo Pignone of the following types:
- 11-13-18-18L-24 direct (air to close action)
- 11-13-18-18L-24 reverse (air to open action)
1.1. DEFINITIONS
• Dangerous zone : a zone that is adjacent to the valve;
• Exposed person : who operate close to the valve;
• Operator : N. Pignone technical staff, customer’s trained staff or handling

personnel.
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE
By increasing the diaphragm command fluid (1) pressure /63/, a force is

generated which moves the actuator stem /59/ once the spring /58/ pre-load is
exceeded.
In direct actuators, increasing the command fluid pressure in the upper part of
the diaphragm results in a descending movement of the actuator stem.
In reverse actuators, increasing the command fluid pressure in the lower part of
the diaphragm results in an ascending movement of the actuator stem.
The compression of the spring will result in a reverse movement for the stem, if
the pressure decreases.
The stem stroke is directly proportional to command fluid pressure.
The actuator stem will start moving when the value of the command fluid
pressure on the diaphragm becomes equal to the spring drive minimum value.
The stem will complete its stroke when the maximum value of the command
fluid pressure is reached.
Actuators can also be equipped with manual commands on side. They are used
to control the valve manually in case of emergency, or when there is no power
supply.
(1) The actuator control fluid is air or inert gas. When explicitly required in the technical data sheet or in
the actuator purchase documentation, the control fluid can be fuel gas.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
3. STORAGE
Actuators must be stored in a closed, dry and ventilated place with relative
humidity lower than 90%.
Moreover, aggressive vapours or gasses should not be present in the
stockroom.
The actuator must be protected together with the valve inside a polyethylene
bag with a dehydrant.
For all the valves which are stored for over six months (including the time
required for shipping until arrival on the plant) the following operations must be
carried out :
- disassembly of all accessories (positioner, filter, electrical limit stop, position
transmitter, lock-up, etc.) and storage them in sealed polythene bags, each
one of which contains a dehydratant bag;
- unloading the actuator spring until the pre-load is removed;
- in particular environments, it is advisable to protect the unpainted parts with
a vaseline film or with easily soluble protective paint;
- protecting the small diameter holes (for air lines, etc.) with plastic caps
locked with sealing tape.
Before operating, the actuators must be repaied and calibrated by specialised
personnel who will also consider the need of replacing all the sealing
elements.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
4. INSTALLATION AND START UP
Position the actuator so as to ensure access to the accessories and to the

movement handwheel (if present) as well as dismantling for maintenance.
Appropriate tubes are used to send the command signal from the regulator to
the valve.
The connections must be made with straight or bent joints with “NPT” threads.
The attachment on the servo-motor is ¼” or ½” NPT.
Actuators are usually assembled vertically; however, if necessary, considering
the accuracy of the machining and alignment of the internal components, the
actuator can be assembled and will operate properly with the stem slightly
inclined, if it is adequately supported.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
DO NOT HARNESS THE VALVE IN THE ACTUATOR AREA OR INVOLVING THE ACTUATOR
STEM / VALVE STEM.
NON-COMPLIANCE WITH THIS PROVISION CAN CAUSE A MISALIGNMENT BETWEEN THE
ACTUATOR STEM AND THE VALVE STEM.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
MISALIGNMENT BETWEEN THE ACTUATOR STEM AND THE VALVE STEM CAN DAMAGE THE
SEAL ON THE STEM WITH ENSUING SPILLAGE OF OPERATION FLUID.
THIS MAY REPRESENT A SOURCE OF FIRE AND ENSUING EXPLOSION.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
THE INCORRECT ASSEMBLY OF THE ACTUATOR ON THE VALVE MAY CAUSE SEIZURE OF
THE MOVING PARTS.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
SEIZURE OF THE MOVING PARTS CAN CAUSE A TEMPERATURE INCREASE THAT MAY
REPRESENT A SOURCE OF FIRE AND ENSUING EXPLOSION.
Pay attention when lifting and handling a valve to avoid damaging the
accessories.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
DAMAGE TO ELECTRIC ACCESSORIES MAY CAUSE A LOSS OF THEIR ELECTRIC PROTECTION

LEVELS. DAMAGE TO PNEUMATIC ACCESSORIES OR TO THE PNEUMATIC CIRCUIT CAUSES
A SPILLAGE OF THE ACTUATING FLUID.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
THE LOSS OF ELECTRIC PROTECTION LEVELS AND THE SPILLAGE OF THE ACTUATING
FLUID, WHEN THE LATTER IS ALSO THE PROCESS FLUID, IT MAY REPRESENT A SOURCE OF
FIRE AND ENSUING EXPLOSION.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
4.1. SERVICES
For the pneumatic control, clean and dry air or, when explicitly required, fuel
gas whit no comburent are required.
For this reason we recommend appropriate filters and pressure regulators to be
fitted to air supply lines.
The command fluid pressure value is reported on the technical data sheet and
on the appropriate plate fitted to the valve.
If there are any doubts, contact Nuovo Pignone technical department.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
DAMAGE TO ELECTRIC ACCESSORIES MAY CAUSE A LOSS IN THEIR ELECTRIC PROTECTION

LEVELS. DAMAGE TO PNEUMATIC ACCESSORIES OR TO THE PNEUMATIC CIRCUIT CAUSES
A SPILLAGE OF THE ACTUATING FLUID.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
IN ACTUATORS SUPPLIED WITH FLUID FUEL, ANY FLUID SPILLAGE TO THE OUTSIDE OR
THE ENTRY OF AIR OR COMBURENT IN THE LINES AND IN THE ACTUATOR MAY CREATE AN
EXPLOSIVE MIXTURE AND A SOURCE OF FIRE AND ENSUING EXPLOSION.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
4.2. SETTING UP AND CALIBRATION (Ref. Figs. 1 ÷ 4)
The actuators are supplied already calibrated.

For further control of the calibration, a manometer is required to measure the
pressure on the servomotor as well as a pressure reducer with an outlet that
can be regulated from "0" to a higher value than that of the final spring load
indicated on the characteristics plate of the valve.
After having inserted the reducer between the command fluid -supply line and
the manometer connected and communicating with the diaphragm chamber,
proceed as described :
1) Slowly increase the pressure on the diaphragm /63/ by means of the
command fluid pressure reducer knob and check that the beginning of
stem /59/ movement occurs at a equal to the minimum calibration value.
a – if the read pressure value is greater than this one, the spring /58/ must
be slightly unloaded by unscrewing the adjusting screw /88/.
b – if a value equal to the minimum calibration value is read, the spring
/58/ must be slightly loaded by tightening the adjusting screw /88/.
WARNING : Before regulating the spring, always bring the command fluid
pressure level to zero.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
FAILURE TO DEPRESSURIZE THE LINES DURING CALIBRATION MAY CAUSE SPILLAGE OF

PROCESS FLUID.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
SPILLAGE OF PROCESS FLUID MAY REPRESENT A SOURCE OF FIRE AND ENSUING

EXPLOSION.
2) Repeat the operations described in 1-a) and 1-b) until the required
conditions are reached for subsequent approximations.
3) Taking a reference point on the stem /59/, slightly supply the actuator and
check that the required stroke is achieved.
4) Once the stroke is checked, remove supply from the actuator.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
5. MAINTENANCE
Prior to carrying out any maintenance operation on the valve, make sure that it
is insulated and depressurized and that the supply and/or any electrical
connection are disconnected;
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
FAILURE TO DEPRESSURIZE THE LINES DURING CALIBRATION MAY CAUSE SPILLAGE OF

PROCESS FLUID.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
SPILLAGE OF PROCESS FLUID MAY REPRESENT A SOURCE OF FIRE AND ENSUING

EXPLOSION.
The actuator's simple construction and operative reliability mean that it can be
used safely, even without extraordinary maintenance interventions.
If the actuator is left idle for a long time, it might be necessary to replace the
diaphragm /63/, recalibrate the spring /58/ and replace the seal ring /52/ in
reverse actuators.
WARNING Before disassembling the actuator from the valve, the spring
/58/ must be unloaded by means of the adjusting screw /88/. Moreover, the
actuator must be both pneumatically and electrically (if this is provided for)
isolated.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
5.1. REPLACING THE DIAPHRAGM AND THE SEAL RING /52/
Possible causes of damage to the diaphragm include exposure to atmospheric

agents or the deteriorating action of the command fluid.
If the damaged parts are to be inspected or replaced, the following instructions
should be followed for partial or total dismounting, while referring to the
assembly drawings for the position of the various components mentioned.
The actuator's diaphragm can be replaced without removing the valve-actuator
unit from the line; however, it is advisable to remove the actuator from the valve
and examined it in the workshop.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
FAILURE OF THE MEMBRANE OR OF THE O RING MAY CAUSE SPILLAGE OF THE CONTROL
FLUID.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
5.1.1. ACTUATORS WITH “AIR CLOSE” ACTION (Ref. Figs. 1 - 3)
1) Unload the spring /58/ by unscrewing the adjusting screw /88/ and
counting the number of turns.
2) Unscrew the nuts /68/ and remove the upper shell /54/.
3) Replace the diaphragm /63/.
4) Reassemble the parts that had been removed and adjust the spring /58/
using the adjusting screw /88/ with the same number of turns as in point 1)
5) Calibrate the actuator, following the instructions in par. 4.2.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
PAINTING THE AREA WHERE THE BOLTS OF SHELLS AND FRAME REST MAY NOT
GUARANTEE ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY.
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE
ABSENCE OF ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY MAY REPRESENT A SOURCE OF FIRE AND ENSUING

EXPLOSION.
5.1.2. ACTUATORS WITH “AIR OPEN” ACTION (Ref. Figs. 2 - 4)
1) Unload the spring /58/ by unscrewing the adjusting screw /88/ and
counting the number of turns.
2) Unscrew the nuts /68/ and remove the upper shell /54/.
3) Unscrew the locking nut /109/, then pull out the safety washer /56/, the
disk holder /84/ and the diaphragm disk /62/.
4) Remove the diaphragm /63/ and the shoulder washer /64/.
5) Unscrew the screws /85/, remove the lower shell /55/ and the flange /93/
with the gasket /53/.
6) Remove the seal ring /52/. If the same is eventually worn out, substitute it
with a new one.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
7) Reassemble the flange /93/, paying attention not to damage the seal ring
/52/.
8) Reassemble the gasket /53/, the lower shell /55/ and tighten the screws
/85/.
9) Locate the shoulder washer /64/ and the new diaphragm /63/.
10) Locate the diaphragm disk /62/, the disk holder /84/, the safety washer /56/
and screw the locking nut /109/.
11) Reassemble the upper shell /54/, by tightening the screws /69/ with the
nuts /68/; after this adjust the spring /58/ using the adjusting screw /88/
with the same number of turns as in point 1).
12) Calibrate the actuator, following the instructions in par. 4.2.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE

EXPLOSION.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
5.2. SIDE MANUAL COMMAND MAINTENANCE
If the damaged parts must be inspected or replaced, the following instructions

should be followed for partial or total dismantling, referring to the assembly
drawing for the position of the various components mentioned.
5.2.1. SIDE MANUAL COMMAND DISASSEMBLY (Ref. Figs. 5 – 6 - 7)
1) Sling the side manual command unit, unscrew the screws /173/ and /175/
and move it away from the actuator by pulling out the levers /184/ from the
screw nut /234/ screwed to the actuator stem /59/.
2) Unscrew the nut /201/, remove the washer /203/ and the closing disk
/219/.
3) Pull out the handwheel /200/ together with the tab /207/.
4) Loosen the dowel /197/ blocking the bearing support /179/ and, using the
appropriate holes, unscrew this from the manual command body /171/;
after this remove the bearing /190/.
5) Unscrew the screw /196/ and remove the position indicator /194/ from the
screw nut /178/. In actuators of the 11 and 13 type, the position indicator
has a threaded end and, therefore, is screwed directly on the screw nut.
6) Unscrew the nuts /189/, pull out the screws /187/ and remove the spacers
/186/ between the two levers /184/.
7) For 11-13-18 type actuators: extract the elastic rings /181/ with some
pliers, extract the pin /180/ and pull out the levers /184/ from the screw nut
/178/ screwed on the movement screw /177/ of the manual command unit.
For 18L-24 type actuators: unscrew the nuts /183/, extract the pin /180/
and pull out the levers /184/ from the screw nut /178/ screwed on the
movement screw of the manual command unit.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
8) Unscrew the movement screw /177/ from the screw nut /178/.
9) Remove the movement screw /177/ from the manual command body /171/
and extract the other bearing /190/.
5.2.2. CONTROLS, REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS
1) Check that the metal surfaces, especially the reciprocal movement ones,
are not damaged.
2) Clean the metal parts with cloths soaked in acetone, paying special
attention to the hollow areas that may house dangerous inclusions.
3) Grind the damaged parts if possible, otherwise replace them.
5.2.3. SIDE MANUAL COMMAND REASSEMBLY (Ref. Figs. 5 – 6 - 7)
NOTE: Before reassembling the components, smother the bearings, the

threaded parts and all internal moving parts with grease
type : MOLYCOTE.
1) Insert the bearing /190/ in the appropriate seat in the manual command
body /171/.
2) Insert the movement screw /177/ into the manual command body /171/
and screw it up in the screw nut /178/.
3) Insert the other bearing /190/ into the bearing support /179/ and screw up
the latter in the manual command body /171/ until it is completely
tightened.
4) Loosen the support /179/ with one turn and lock it with the dowel /197/.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
5) Put the levers /184/ in position, insert the pin /180/ into the hole on the
manual command body /171/ and reassemble the elastic rings /181/ in the
areas on the pin ends /180/ or screw the nuts /183/ with the washers /182/
(for 18L - 24 type actuators).
6) Place the two spacers /186/ between the two levers /184/ and lock them
with the screws /187/, the washers /188/ and the nuts /189/.
7) Position the tab /207/ in the hollow area at the end of the movement screw
/177/ and insert the handwheel /200/.
8) Reassemble the closing disk /219/ and lock it together with the handwheel
/200/ using the nut /201/ and washer /203/.
9) Reassemble the position indicator /194/ with the screw /196/ and the
washer /195/ on the screw nut /178/. In 11 and 13 type actuator, screw the
position indicator directly on the screw nut by means of its threaded end.
10) Sling the side manual command unit and move it towards the actuator
already assembled on the valve.
11) Insert the ends of the levers /184/ into the screw nut /234/ screwed on the
actuator stem /59/. In 18L and 24 type actuators, use the stem coupling
sleeve /75/ which works like a screw nut.
12) Fix the side manual command unit to the actuator with the screws /173/
and /175/ and the washer /172/ and /174/.
CAUTION
! MESSAGE
EXPLOSION RISK
MESSAGE

EXPLOSION.

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
6. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS (Ref. Figs. 1÷7)
We recommend the following spare parts for an operating period of one to two
years and between one and four actuators :
MARK DENOMINATION QUANTITY
52 SEAL RING (for reverse acuators) 2

53 GASKET (for reverse acuators) 2
61 O-RING (for reverse acuators) 2
63 DIAPHAGM 1
177 MOVEMENT SCREW (for side man. com.) 1
178 SCREW NUT (for side manual command) 1
190 BEARING (for side manual command) 2

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
7. ACTUATOR PART LIST
POS. DENOMINATION
POS. DENOMINATION
51 Yoke
83 Vent cap
52 Stem seal ring
84 Disk holder
53 Gasket
85 Screw
54 Upper shell
87 Spring holder
55 Lower shell
88 Adjusting screw
56 Safety washer
89 Coned nut
58 Spring
90 Flat washer
59 Actuator stem
92 Bearing
61 Seal ring
93 Flange
62 Diaphragm disk
94 Eyebolt
63 Diaphragm
96 Guide bushing
64 Shoulder washer
97 Sleeve screw
68 Shell nut
69 Shell screw
109 Nut
71 Stroke plate
72 Stroke plate screw
73 Elastic washer
74 Plate nut
75 Coupling sleeve
77 Stroke indicator
78 Nut
79 Clamp ring
81 Characteristic plate
82 Self-threaded rivet

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Fig. 1 – Actuator with “air close” action (TYPE 11-13-18)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Per the
For i campi
3÷15molla
and 6÷30
spring
3÷15 efields,
6÷30 the
nonbearing
va
/92/ should not be mounted
montato il cuscinetto /92/.
Fig. 2 – Actuator with “air open” action (TYPE 11-13-18)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
For the 3÷15 and 6÷30

spring fields, the bearing
Fig. 3 – Actuator with “air close” action (TYPE 18L - 24)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Perthe
For i campi
3÷15 molla
and 6÷30
spring
3÷15 fields,
e 6÷30the
nonbearing
va
montato il cuscinetto /92/.
Fig. 4 – Actuator with “air open” action (TYPE 18L - 24)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
8. PART LIST FOR SIDE MANUAL

COMMAND
POS. DENOMINAZIONE POS. DENOMINAZIONE

171 Manual command body 197 Dowel
172 Washer 197a Dowel counternut
173 Screw 200 Handwheel
174 Washer 201 Nuts for handwheel
175 Screw 203 Washer for handwheel
177 Movement screw
178 Screw nut 207 Tab
179 Bearing support
180 Lever central pin 214 Blocking fork for handwheel
181 Elastic ring 215 Pin for fork
182 Washer for pin 216 Washer for fork
183 Nut for pin 217 Split pin
184 Lever 218 Greasing nipple
186 Spacer for levers 219 Closing disk
187 Screw for lever
188 Washer for lever 234 Screw nut for actuator stem
189 Nut for lever
190 Cone-shaped roller bearing
192 Position plate
193 Plate rivet
194 Washer for indicator
195 Screw for indicator
196 Screw for lever

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Fig. 5 – Side manual command (for actuator TYPE 11-13)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Fig. 6 – Side manual command (for actuator TYPE 18)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Fig. 7 – Side manual command (for actuator TYPE 18L-24)

NOM02004/4
1 General revision

SECTION 4
ACCESSORIES MANUALS
Nuovo Pignone
BARI
Operating Instructions Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
42/18-80-EN
TZIDC-200
Pos: 1 /Titelblätter / Copyright/BA-IA/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200 @ 18\mod_1205909868765_3101.doc @ 171270
for 4 ... 20 mA two-wire technology,

Flameproof (Enclosure)
• Software version 3.00

Blinder Text
Pos: 2 /======= Seitenumbruch ======== @ 0\mod_1126532365768_3101.doc @ 3830
Pos: 3 /Titelblätter / Copyright/Copyright-Seite @ 0\mod_1138781938968_3101.doc @ 3122
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
TZIDC-200
Operating Instructions
42/18-80-EN
06.2008
Rev. E
Manufacturer:
ABB Automation Products GmbH
Schillerstraße 72
32425 Minden
Germany
Tel.: +49 551 905-534
Fax: +49 551 905-555
CCC-support.deapr@de.abb.com
© Copyright 2008 by ABB Automation Products GmbH

Subject to change without notice
This document is protected by copyright. It assists the user with the safe and efficient operation of the
device. The contents may not be copied or reproduced in whole or in excerpts without prior approval of
the copyright holder.
Pos: 4 /Inhaltsverzeichnis/Inhaltsverzeichnis für alle Dokumente @ 0\mod_1138710310890_3101.doc @ 3129

Contents
2 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Contents
1 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................................5
1.1 General Safety Information ............................................................................................................................5
1.2 Proper use......................................................................................................................................................5
1.3 Technical limits...............................................................................................................................................5
1.4 Warranty provision .........................................................................................................................................6
1.5 Labels and symbols........................................................................................................................................6
1.5.1 Symbols and warnings ............................................................................................................................6
1.5.2 Name plate ..............................................................................................................................................7
1.6 Operator liability .............................................................................................................................................7
1.7 Personnel qualification ...................................................................................................................................7
1.8 Returning devices...........................................................................................................................................8
1.9 Disposal..........................................................................................................................................................8
1.9.1 Information on WEEE directive 2002/96/EC (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) ...................8
1.10 Transport safety information ..........................................................................................................................8
1.11 Storage conditions..........................................................................................................................................9
1.12 Installation safety information.........................................................................................................................9
1.13 Electrical installation safety information .........................................................................................................9
1.14 Operating safety information ........................................................................................................................10
2 Explosion-protection safety precautions........................................................................................................10
3 Design and function ..........................................................................................................................................11
4 Installation..........................................................................................................................................................12
4.1 Operating conditions at installation site........................................................................................................12
4.2 Mechanical mount ........................................................................................................................................12
4.2.1 General..................................................................................................................................................12
4.2.2 Mounting on linear actuators.................................................................................................................14
4.2.3 Mounting on rotary actuator ..................................................................................................................19
5 Electrical connection ........................................................................................................................................22
5.1 Screw terminal assignments ........................................................................................................................23
5.2 Cable entry ...................................................................................................................................................24
5.3 Setting the mechanical feedback .................................................................................................................25
5.3.1 Mechanical position indicator ................................................................................................................25
5.3.2 Mechanical digital feedback with proximity switches ............................................................................25
5.3.3 Mechanical feedback with microswitches for 24 V ...............................................................................25
6 Pneumatic connection ......................................................................................................................................26
7 Startup Operation ..............................................................................................................................................28
7.1 Operating modes..........................................................................................................................................29
7.2 Sample parameters ......................................................................................................................................30
8 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................................32
8.1 Replacing the filter element..........................................................................................................................32
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 3
Contents
8.2 Functional check for emergency shutdown module.....................................................................................33
9 Technical data....................................................................................................................................................34
9.1 Input..............................................................................................................................................................34
9.2 Output...........................................................................................................................................................34
9.3 Travel............................................................................................................................................................34
9.4 Air supply......................................................................................................................................................34
9.5 Transmission data and influences................................................................................................................35
9.6 Environmental capabilities ...........................................................................................................................35
9.7 Housing ........................................................................................................................................................35
9.8 Safety Integrity Level....................................................................................................................................35
9.9 Explosion protection .....................................................................................................................................36
9.10 Options .........................................................................................................................................................37
9.11 Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................38
10 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................39
10.1 Permits and certifications .............................................................................................................................39
11 Index ...................................................................................................................................................................64
4 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Safety
Pos: 5.1 /Überschriften/1/S - U/Sicherheit @ 0\mod_1129703894050_3101.doc @ 3168
1 Safety
Pos: 5.2 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Allgemeines zur Sicherheit @ 0\mod_1129703939516_3101.doc @ 3260
1.1 General Safety Information
The “Safety” chapter provides an overview of the safety aspects to be observed for the
operation of the device.
The device is built based on state-of-the-art technology and is operationally safe. It was tested
and left the factory in a proper state. The requirements in the manual as well as the
documentation and certificates must be observed and followed in order to maintain this state for
the period of operation.
The general safety requirements must be complied with completely during operation of the
device. In addition to the general information, the individual chapters of the manual contain
descriptions about processes or procedural instructions with specific safety information.
Only the observance of all safety information enables the optimal protection of personnel as well
as the environment from hazards and the safe and trouble-free operation of the device.
Pos: 5.3 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/A - C/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 1\mod_1147675805609_3101.doc @ 10755
1.2 Proper use

Pos: 5.4 /Sicherheit/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 19\mod_1206535771187_3101.doc @ 172694
TZIDC-200 positioners are electro-pneumatic positioning devices for use with pneumatically
controlled actuators. They are intended for mounting on linear and rotary actuators according to
instructions in these operating instructions. The device may only be used for the applications
listed in these operating instructions and in the data sheet. All other use is improper use.
The signal circuit as well as the input and output wiring must comply with the specified
explosion protection (see "Certificates” in the appendix of the operating instructions).
The maximum allowable ambient temperature range from -40 °C to 85 °C (-40 ... 185 °F) (for
type SJ2-S1N (NO) proximity switches): -25 … 85 °C (-13 … 185 °F) may not be exceeded.
Pos: 5.5 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Hinweis zur bestimmungswidrigren Verwendung (Wartung/Reparatur) @ 0\mod_1129707002440_3101.doc @ 3240
Repairs, alterations and enhancements or the installation of replacement parts is only

permissible as far as described in the manual. Further actions must be verified with ABB
Automation Products GmbH. Excluded from this are repairs performed by ABB-authorized
specialist shops.
Pos: 5.6 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Technische Grenzwerte BA @ 0\mod_1140156564953_3101.doc @ 3252
1.3 Technical limits
The device is designed for use exclusively within the stated values on the name plate and in the
technical specifications (see "Technical Specifications” chapter and data sheet). These must be
complied with accordingly, e.g.:
• The maximum operating temperature may not be exceeded.
• The permitted operating temperature may not be exceeded.
• The housing protection system must be observed.
Pos: 5.7 /======= Seitenumbruch ======== @ 0\mod_1126532365768_3101.doc @ 3830
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 5
Safety
Pos: 5.8 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Gewährleistungsbestimmungen @ 0\mod_1129706207246_3101.doc @ 3261
1.4 Warranty provision
A use contrary to the device’s stipulated use, disregarding of this manual, the use of under-
qualified personnel as well as unauthorized alterations excludes the manufacturer of liability
from any resulting damages. The manufacturer’s warranty expires.
Pos: 5.9 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/S - U/Schilder und Symbole @ 0\mod_1129721947139_3101.doc @ 3204
1.5 Labels and symbols

Pos: 5.10 /Überschriften/1.1.1/1-spaltig/Symbole und Signalwörter @ 20\mod_1208422698260_3101.doc @ 180868
1.5.1 Symbols and warnings

Pos: 5.11 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Symbole und Signalwörter @ 20\mod_1208422453167_3101.doc @ 180843
Danger – <Serious damage to health / risk to life>

One of these symbols in conjunction with the “Danger“ warning indicates an imminent danger.
If it is not avoided, death or serious injury will result.
Warning – <Bodily injury>

The symbol in conjunction with the “Warning“ message indicates a possibly dangerous
situation. If it is not avoided, death or serious injury could result.
Caution – <Slight injuries>

The symbol in conjunction with the “Caution“ message indicates a possibly dangerous
situation. If it is not avoided, slight or minor injury can result. May also be used for property
damage warnings.
Notice – <Property damage>!

The symbol indicates a possibly damaging situation. If it is not avoided, the product or
something in its area can be damaged.
Important
The symbol indicates operator tips or especially useful information. This is not a message for a
dangerous or damaging situation.
6 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Safety
Pos: 5.13 /Überschriften/1.1.1/1-spaltig/Typenschild @ 0\mod_1140617210906_3101.doc @ 3227
1.5.2 Name plate

Pos: 5.14 /Sicherheit/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Typenschild TZIDC-200 @ 20\mod_1208939852843_3101.doc @ 181988
Fig. 1: Name plate

1 Complete model name 6 Supply pressure
2 Software version 7 Input
3 Serial number 8 Output
4 NL number 9 Pneumatic safety position
5 Year 10 Options
Pos: 5.15 /Sicherheit/Aktorik/Allgemein/Pflichten des Betreibers @ 10\mod_1181723170562_3101.doc @ 105157
1.6 Operator liability
The operators must strictly observe the applicable national regulations in their countries with
regards to installation, function tests, repairs, and maintenance of electrical devices.
Pos: 5.16 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/P - R/Qualifikation des Personals @ 19\mod_1206964369218_3101.doc @ 174180
1.7 Personnel qualification

Pos: 5.17 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Organisatorische Maßnahmen/Qualifiziertes Personal (Ex-Schutz) @ 1\mod_1144310262609_3101.doc @ 5731
Work on explosion-proof devices may only be performed by persons with proper training or
instruction and who are authorized to work on explosion-proof devices and installations.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 7
Safety
Pos: 5.19 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Organisatorische Maßnahmen/Rücksendung von Geräten @ 0\mod_1129730744499_3101.doc @ 3248
1.8 Returning devices
Use the original packaging or a suitably secure packaging for returning the device for repair or
for recalibration. Include the properly filled out return form (see attachment) with the device.
According to EC guidelines for hazardous materials, the owner of hazardous waste is
responsible for its disposal or must observe the following regulations for its shipping:
All delivered devices to ABB Automation Products GmbH must be free from any hazardous
materials (acids, alkali, solvents, etc.).
Pos: 5.20 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Organisatorische Maßnahmen/Entsorgung @ 10\mod_1176447410937_3101.doc @ 81544
1.9 Disposal
ABB Automation Products GmbH actively promotes environmental consciousness and has an
operational management system in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9001:2000,
EN ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001. Our products and solutions should have minimum
impact on the environment and persons during manufacture, storage, transport, use and
disposal.
This includes the environmentally friendly use of natural resources. Through its publications
ABB conducts an open dialog with the public.
This product/solution is manufactured from materials that can be reused by specialized
recycling companies.
1.9.1 Information on WEEE directive 2002/96/EC (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment)
This product/solution is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/EC and relevant national
laws (e.g., ElektroG in Germany).
Dispose of the product/solution directly in a specialized recycling facility and do not use the
municipal garbage. Only privately used products may be disposed of in the municipal garbage
according to the WEEE directive 2002/96/EC. Proper disposal prevents negative effects on
people and the environment, and supports the reuse of valuable raw materials.
If it is not possible to dispose of old equipment properly, ABB Service can accept and dispose of
returns for a fee.
Pos: 5.21 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/S - U/Sicherheitshinweise zum Transport @ 0\mod_1140166475703_3101.doc @ 3206
1.10 Transport safety information

Pos: 5.22 /Transport/Allgemein/Prüfung @ 0\mod_1129815371197_3101.doc @ 3317
Check the devices for possible damage that may have occurred during transport. Damages in
transit must be recorded on the transport documents. All claims for damages must be claimed
without delay against the shipper and before the installation.
8 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Safety
Pos: 5.24 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/J - L/Lagerbedingungen @ 8\mod_1176907016921_3101.doc @ 84229
1.11 Storage conditions

Pos: 5.25 /Sicherheit/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Lagerbedingungen @ 19\mod_1206964758562_3101.doc @ 174203
The unit must be stored in dry and dust-free conditions. The unit is also protected by a
dessicant in the packaging.
The storage temperature should be between -40 ... 85 °C (-40 ... 185 °F).
The storage time is basically indefinite. However, the warranty conditions stipulated in the order
confirmation of the supplier are valid.
Pos: 5.26 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/S - U/Sicherheitshinweise zur Montage @ 0\mod_1140166528109_3101.doc @ 3208
1.12 Installation safety information

Pos: 5.27 /Sicherheit/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Sicherheitshinweise zur Montage @ 19\mod_1207038975703_3101.doc @ 174759
Caution - Risk of injury!

Incorrect parameter values can cause the valve to move unexpectedly. This can lead to
process failures and result in injuries.
Before recommissioning a TZIDC-200 positioner that was used at another location, the device
must always be reset to factory settings. Never start Autoadjust before restoring factory
settings.
• Only qualified specialists who have been trained for these tasks are authorized to mount and
adjust the unit, and to make the electrical connection.
• When working on the unit always observe the locally valid accident prevention regulations
and the regulations concerning the construction of technical installations.
Pos: 5.28 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/S - U/Sicherheitshinweise zur elektrischen Installation @ 0\mod_1140166567843_3101.doc @ 3207
1.13 Electrical installation safety information

Pos: 5.29 /Sicherheit/Allgemein/Sicherheitshinweise zur elektrischen Installation @ 13\mod_1191930430247_3101.doc @ 128893
The electrical connection may only be performed by authorized specialist personnel according
to the electrical plans.
Comply with electrical connection information in the manual. Otherwise, the electrical protection
class can be affected.
The secure separation of contact-dangerous electrical circuits is only guaranteed when the
connected devices fulfill the requirements of the DIN EN 61140 (VDE 0140 Part 1) (basic
requirements for secure separation).
For secure separation, run the supply lines separated from contact-dangerous electrical circuits
or additionally insulate them.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 9
Explosion-protection safety precautions
Pos: 5.31 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/S - U/Sicherheitshinweise zum Betrieb @ 0\mod_1140166424437_3101.doc @ 3205
1.14 Operating safety information

Pos: 5.32 /Sicherheit/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Sicherheitshinweise zum Betrieb @ 19\mod_1207039356578_3101.doc @ 175166
Before switching on the unit make sure that your installation complies with the environmental
conditions listed in the chapter "Technical data" or in the data sheet.
If there is a chance that safe operation is no longer possible, take the unit out of operation and
secure against unintended startup.
When mounting the unit in areas that may be accessed by unauthorized persons, take the
required protective measures.
Pos: 6.1 /Überschriften/1/D - F/Ex-technische Sicherheitshinweise @ 9\mod_1181416415484_3101.doc @ 102826
2 Explosion-protection safety precautions

Pos: 6.2 /Ex-technische Sicherheitshinweise/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Ex-technische Sicherheitshinweise @ 19\mod_1207574103984_3101.doc @ 178577
Depending on the type of explosion protection, an Ex label is attached to the left of the
positioner beside the main name plate. It shows the explosion protection and the unit's relevant
Ex certificate.
Requirements / preconditions for safe operation of the positioner:
Important
Observe with the unit’s relevant technical data and the special conditions in accordance with
the relevant certificate.
Warning! Risk of explosion!

Never open the device immediately after switch-off. Hot parts inside the housing may result in
risk of explosion.
Always wait at least four minutes before opening the unit.
• Manipulation of the device by users is not permitted. Modifications to the unit may only be
performed by the manufacturer or an explosion protection specialist.
• The unit must be supplied with instrument air that is free of oil, water and dust. Do not use
flammable gas nor oxygen or oxygen-enriched gas.
• Variants that meet requirements for the "intrinsically safe" explosion-protection class may no
longer be used as intrinsically safe, if they are used in the "hermetically sealed" explosion-
protection class.
• Secure the cable and tube entries against turning and loosening by using security adhesive
of medium strength.
• In the event of high torsional forces, the bearing sleeves on the shaft for the position pickoff
must be replaced due to wear (significant system deviation).
• If the positioner is used at an ambient temperature above 60 °C (140 °F) or below -
20 °C (-4°F), use cable entries and lines approved for a service temperature corresponding
to the maximum ambient temperature increased by 10 K or corresponding to the minimum
ambient temperature, respectively.
10 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Design and function
Pos: 8.1 /Überschriften/1/A - C/Aufbau und Funktion @ 0\mod_1129797620733_3101.doc @ 3140
3 Design and function

Pos: 8.2 /Aufbau und Funktion/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Schematische Darstellung @ 20\mod_1209372425671_3101.doc @ 182758
Basic model Optional upgrades
Fig. 2: TZIDC-200 schematic diagram

Basic model Optional upgrades
1 LKS plug 9 Plug module for analog feedback (4 … 20 mA)
2 Positioning signal 4 … 20 mA 10 Plug-in module for safety shutdown (forced depressurization)
3 Digital input 11 Plug module for digital feedback
4 Digital output DO 12 Installation kit for mechanical position indicator
5 Air supply, 1.4 …6 bar (20 … 90 psi) 13 Installation kit for digital feedback with proximity switches
6 Exhaust 14 Installation kit for digital feedback with 24 V microswitches
7 I/P module with 3/3-way valve
8 Position sensor (optional up to 270° rotation angle)
Important
With optional upgrades either the “Installation kit for digital feedback with proximity switches” (13) or the “Installation
kit for digital feedback with microswitches 24 V” (14) can be used.
Pos: 8.3 /Aufbau und Funktion/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Aufbau und Funktion @ 19\mod_1206969660468_3101.doc @ 174226
Functionality
The TZIDC-200 is an electronically configurable positioner with communication capabilities
designed for mounting on pneumatic linear or rotary actuators.
Fully automatic determination of the control parameters and adaptation to the final control
element yield considerable time savings and an optimal control behavior.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 11
Installation
Pos: 10.1 /Überschriften/1/M - O/Montage @ 0\mod_1140519732218_3101.doc @ 3159
4 Installation
Pos: 10.2 /Hinweise/Gefahr/Gefahr - Wiedereinsatz TZIDC @ 19\mod_1207030092281_3101.doc @ 174653

Incorrect parameter values can cause the valve to move unexpectedly. This can lead to
process failures and result in injuries.
Before recommissioning a TZIDC-200 positioner that was used at another location, the device
must always be reset to factory settings. Never start Autoadjust before restoring factory
settings.
Pos: 10.3 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/A - C/Betriebsbedingungen am Installationsort @ 12\mod_1186668341281_3101.doc @ 113771
4.1 Operating conditions at installation site

Pos: 10.4 /Hinweise/Wichtig/Wichtig - Betriebsbedingungen am Installationsort @ 19\mod_1206626800265_3101.doc @ 173018
Important
Before installation, check whether the TZIDC-200 positioner meets the control and safety
requirements for the installation location (actuator or valve).
See chapter Technical data, page 34.
Pos: 10.5 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/M - O/Mechanischer Anbau @ 19\mod_1206707016921_3101.doc @ 173190
4.2 Mechanical mount

Pos: 10.6 /Montage/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Allgemeines @ 19\mod_1207288206468_3101.doc @ 177689
cke
4.2.1 General
Fig. 3: Operating range

The arrow (1) on the positioner feedback shaft (and the lever) must move through the area
marked by the arrows (2).
12 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Installation
Fig. 4: Positioner range

1 Sensor range for linear actuators 3 Operating range for linear actuators
2 Sensor range for rotary actuators 4 Operating range for rotary actuators
Important
During installation make sure that the actuator travel or rotation angle for position feedback is
implemented correctly.
The maximum rotation angle for position feedback is 60° when installed on linear actuators and
120° on rotary actuators. The minimum angle is always 25°.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 13
Installation
Pos: 10.8 /Montage/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Anbau an Linearantriebe @ 19\mod_1207288317406_3101.doc @ 177713
4.2.2 Mounting on linear actuators
For mounting on a linear actuator in accordance with DIN/IEC 534 (lateral mount per NAMUR) a
complete mounting kit is available, and consists of the items in the following table:
Fig. 5: Mounting kit for linear actuators
• Lever (4) with follower pin, for stroke adjustment 10 ... 35 mm (0.39 ... 1.38 inch) or
20 ... 100 mm (0.79 ... 3.94 inch)
• Follower guide (13) with two screws (10), spring washers (11) and clamp plates (12)
• Mount bracket (3) with two screws (6) and two shims (5)
• Screw (1) and shim (2) for mounting to cast iron yoke
• Two U-bolts (7) with two shims (8) and two nuts (9) for mounting to columnar yoke
Required tools:
- Wrench, size 10/13
- Allen key, size 4
14 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Installation
Procedure:
1. Attach follower guide to actuator
Fig. 6
Important
Hand tighten the screws.
• Attach the follower guide (1) and clamp plates (2) with screws (4) and spring washers (3) to
the actuator stem.
2. Assemble the lever (unless preassembled)
Fig. 7
• Insert spring (8) on bolt with follower pin (9).

• Slip the plastic washer (7) onto the bolt and compress the spring with it.
• Insert the bolt with compressed spring into the oblong hole in the lever (6) and fasten it in the
desired position using the plain washer (5) and nut (6) at the lever. The scale on the lever
indicates the link point for the stroke range.
• Place the washer (2) on the screw (1). Insert the screw in the lever and lock with the nut (3).
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 15
Installation
3. Mount the lever and bracket on the positioner
Fig. 8
• Attach the lever (6) to the feedback shaft (5) of the positioner (can only be mounted in one
position due to the flat on the side of the shaft).
• Using the arrow marks (4) check whether the lever moves within the operating range
(between the arrows).
• Hand-tighten the screw (7) on the lever.
• Hold the prepared positioner with loose mount bracket (1) to the actuator so that the follower
pin for the lever enters the follower guide to determine which holes on the positioner must be
used for the mount bracket.
• Attach the mount bracket (1) with screws (2) and shims (3) to the proper holes on the
positioner housing. Tighten the screws as evenly as possible to ensure subsequent linearity.
Align the mount bracket in the oblong hole to ensure that the operating range is symmetrical
(lever moves between the arrows (4)).
4.a Mounting on cast iron yoke
Fig. 9
• Attach the mount bracket (2) with screw (4) and shim (3) to the cast iron yoke (1).
or
16 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Installation
4.a Mounting on columnar yoke
Fig. 10
• Hold the mount bracket (3) in the proper position on the columnar yoke (2).
• Insert the U-bolts (1) from the inside of the columnar yoke (2) through the holes for the
mount bracket.
• Add the washers (4) and nuts (5). Hand tighten the nuts.
Important
Adjust the height of the positioner on the cast iron yoke or columnar yoke until the lever is
horizontal (based on visual check) at half stroke of the valve.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 17
Installation
Fig. 11: Linkage for positioner

1 larger 2 smaller
The scale on the lever indicates the link point for the various stroke ranges of the valve.
Move the bolt with the follower guide into the oblong hole of the lever to adjust the stroke range
of the valve to the operating range for the position sensor.
Moving the link point inward increases the rotation angle of the sensor. Moving the link point
outward reduces the sensor's rotation angle.
Adjust the actuator stroke to make use of as large an angle of rotation as possible (symmetrical
around the center position).
Recommended range for linear actuators: between -28 ... 28°

Minimum angle: 25°
Important
After mounting the unit check whether the positioner is operating within the sensor range.
18 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Installation
Pos: 10.10 /Montage/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Anbau an Schwenkantrieb @ 19\mod_1207288335609_3101.doc @ 177737
4.2.3 Mounting on rotary actuator
For mounting on rotary actuators in accordance with VDI/VDE 3845, the following mounting kit
is available:
Fig. 12
• Adapter (1) with spring (5)

• each four screws M6 (4), spring washers (3) and shim (2) to attach the mounting bracket (6)
on the positioner
• each four screws M5 (7), spring washers (8) and shim (9) to attach the mounting bracket on
the actuator
Required tools:
- Wrench, size 10/13
- Allen key, size 3
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 19
Installation
Procedure:
1. Mounting the adapter on the positioner
Fig. 13
• Determine the mounting position (parallel to actuator or at 90° angle).

• Calculate the rotational direction of the actuator (right or left).
• Move the rotary actuator into home position.
• Based on the mounting position as well as the home position and rotational direction of the
actuator, determine in which position the feedback shaft (1) for the positioner must be pre-
adjusted and in which position the adapter (2) must be placed to enable the positioner to
travel within the proper range (the arrow on the rear of the device must travel within the
admissible range, see Fig. 3).
• Pre-adjust feedback shaft.
• Place the adapter in the proper position on the feedback shaft and fasten with set screws (3).
One of the set screws must be locked in place on the flat side of the feedback shaft.
20 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Installation
2. Attach mounting bracket on the positioner
Fig. 14
1 Mounting bracket
3. Attach positioner to the actuator
Fig. 15
Important
After mounting the unit check whether the operating range for the actuator matches the sensor
range on the positioner.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 21
Electrical connection
Pos: 12.1 /Überschriften/1/D - F/Elektrischer Anschluss @ 0\mod_1140620471687_3101.doc @ 3143
5 Electrical connection
Pos: 12.2 /Hinweise/Gefahr/Gefahr - Explosionsgefahr durch LKS @ 19\mod_1207049553578_3101.doc @ 175419

It is prohibited to use the integrated communication interface (LKS) in an Ex area.
Never use the integrated communication interface (LKS) on the mainboard with a positioner
that is being used in an explosion risk area.
Pos: 12.3 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Elektrischer Anschluss @ 19\mod_1207293454156_3101.doc @ 177907
1. Strip the wire by approx. 8 mm (0.32 inch).

2. To connect the signal lines, the emergency shutdown module and the proximity switches or
microswitches, insert the wire ends from the left into the respective screw terminals and
hand-tighten the screws (access from above). To connect a plug-in module, insert the wire
ends from above in the appropriate screw terminals and hand-tighten the screws (access
from the side).
Pos: 12.4 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Anschlussplan @ 19\mod_1207048601171_3101.doc @ 175373
Fig. 16: Terminal connection diagram

A Basic model 1 Analog input
B Options 2 Digital input
3 Digital output DO
4 Digital feedback
5 Analog feedback
6 Proximity switches
7 Microswitches
8 Emergency shutdown module
22 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Pos: 12.6 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/A - C/Belegung der Schraubklemmen @ 19\mod_1207048913968_3101.doc @ 175396
5.1 Screw terminal assignments

Pos: 12.7 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Belegung der Schraubklemmen @ 20\mod_1208770154609_3101.doc @ 181175
Fig. 17
1 Module for analog position feedback 6 Digital output DO
2 Module for digital feedback or service switch of 7 Digital input DI
emergency shutdown module 8 Signal 4 ... 20 mA
3 Module for digital position feedback or terminals of 9 Grounding screw
the shutdown module
4 Installation kit for digital position feedback, either
proximity switches or 24 V microswitches
5 Same as 4
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 23
Pos: 12.9 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/J - L/Kabeleinführung @ 19\mod_1206944387687_3101.doc @ 173798
5.2 Cable entry

Pos: 12.10 /Hinweise/Wichtig/Wichtig - Hinweis Kabelklemmen @ 19\mod_1206942020687_3101.doc @ 173563
Important
The cable terminals are delivered closed and must be unscrewed before inserting the cable.
Pos: 12.11 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Kabeleinführung TZIDC-200 @ 20\mod_1208857332125_3101.doc @ 181493
For the cable entry in the housing, there are two tap holes 1/2 - 14 NPT or M20 x 1.5 on the left
side of the housing. One of these holes has a cable gland, the other a pipe plug.
Fig. 18: Cable entry

1 Pipe plug
2 Cable gland
24 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Pos: 12.13.1 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/M - O/Einstellung der mechanischen Rückmeldungen @ 19\mod_1206942872640_3101.doc @ 173656
5.3 Setting the mechanical feedback

Pos: 12.13.2 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Mechanische Stellungsanzeige @ 19\mod_1206942137625_3101.doc @ 173586
5.3.1 Mechanical position indicator
1. Loosen the screws for the housing cover and remove it.
2. Rotate the position indicator on the shaft to the desired position.
3. Attach the housing cover.
4. Affix the symbol label to mark the minimum and maximum valve positions on the housing
cover.
Important
The adhesive labels are located on the inside of the cover.
Pos: 12.13.3 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Mechanische digitale Rückmeldung mit Schlitzinitiatoren @ 19\mod_1206942388250_3101.doc @ 173609
ch
5.3.2 Mechanical digital feedback with proximity switches
1. Loosen the screws for the housing cover and remove it.
The device includes slot sensors with sharp edges.
Use a screwdriver to adjust slot sensors.
2. Set the upper and lower switching points for digital feedback as follows:
• Select operating mode 1.2 (see Operating modes page 29) and move the valve by hand into
the lower switching position.
• Use a screwdriver to adjust the slot sensor for proximity switch 1 (lower contact) until it
closes the contact (i.e. until shortly before entering the proximity switch) on the feedback
shaft; the slot sensor enters proximity switch 1 when rotating to the right of the feedback
shaft (viewed from the front).
• Move the valve by hand into the upper switching position.
• Use a screwdriver to adjust the slot sensor for proximity switch 2 (upper contact) until it
closes the contact (i.e. until shortly before entering the proximity switch) on the feedback
shaft; the slot sensor enters proximity switch 2 when rotating to the left of the feedback shaft
(viewed from the front).
3. Attach the housing cover and screw onto housing; hand-tighten screws.
Pos: 12.13.4 /Elektrischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Mechanische Rückmeldung mit Mikroschaltern für 24 V @ 19\mod_1206942645843_3101.doc @ 173632
5.3.3 Mechanical feedback with microswitches for 24 V
1. Set max. contact (1, lower washer); fasten the upper washer with the special adjustment
retainers and rotate lower disk manually to adjust.
2. Set min. contact (2, upper washer); fasten the lower washer with the special adjustment
retainers and rotate upper disk manually to adjust.
3. Connect the microswitch.
4. Attach the housing cover and screw onto housing; hand-tighten screws.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 25
Pneumatic connection
Pos: 14.1 /Überschriften/1/P - R/Pneumatischer Anschluss @ 12\mod_1186733724140_3101.doc @ 114530
6 Pneumatic connection
Pos: 14.2 /Pneumatischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Pneumatischer Anschluss (Hinweise) @ 19\mod_1206708529015_3101.doc @ 173266
Important
The TZIDC-200 positioner must be supplied with instrument air that is free of oil, water and
dust.
The purity and oil content should meet the requirements of Class 3 according to
DIN/ISO 8573-1.
Notice - Potential damage to parts!

Impurities on the pipe and positioner can damage components.
The recommended pipe dimension is 6 x 1 mm. Dust, splinters or any other particles must be
blown off the pipe before connecting.
To connect the air pipes, G1/4 or 1/4-18 NPT tap holes are provided. We recommend that you
use a line with the 6 x 1 mm dimensions.

Pressure above 6 bar (87 psi) can damage the positioner or actuator.
Provisions should be made to ensure that in the event of an error the pressure does not rise
above 6 bar (87 psi).
Pos: 14.3 /Pneumatischer Anschluss/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/pneumatischer Anschluss @ 19\mod_1207289158281_3101.doc @ 177764
Fig. 19: Pneumatic connections

1 Pneumatic outputs
2 Supply air
3 Filter screw
26 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Pneumatic connection
All pneumatic piping connections are located on the right side of the positioner. To connect the
pneumatic pipes, G1/4 or 1/4-18 NPT tap holes are provided. The positioner is labeled
according to the tap holes available. The corresponding pipe connections must be included.
The level of supply pressure must be adjusted to the output pressure in the actuator required to
provide increased actuating force. The operating range for the positioner is between 1.4 ... 6 bar
(20 ... 90 psi).
Arrange the connections according to their marks:

Designation Pipe connection
- Air supply, pressure 1.4 ... 6 bar (20 ... 90 psi)
OUT1 Output pressure for actuator
OUT2 Output pressure for actuator (2nd connection with double-acting actuator)
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 27
Startup Operation
Pos: 16.1 /Überschriften/1/G - I/Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1131980668835_3101.doc @ 3150
7 Startup Operation
Pos: 16.2 /Inbetriebnahme/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Inbetriebnahme @ 19\mod_1206946845390_3101.doc @ 173917
bieten
1. Feed in pneumatic supply power.

2. Feed in electrical supply power.
• Feed in setpoint current 4 ... 20 mA (terminals +11/-12).
3. Check mount:
• Press and hold. Additionally, press or until operating mode 1.3 (manual
adjustment within the sensor range) is displayed. Release .
• Press or to move the actuator into the mechanical end position. Check the end
positions. The rotation angle is displayed in degrees. For high speed mode, press and
simultaneously.
Recommended range:
between -28 ... 28° for linear actuators
between -57 ... 57° for rotary actuators
Minimum angle: 25°
4. Run Autoadjust.
Important
Autoadjust is available for software version 2.XX and higher.
For linear actuators1):

• Press and hold until is displayed. Release the control button.
• Press again and hold until the countdown ends.
• Release . This starts the Autoadjust.
For rotary actuators1):

• Press and hold until is displayed. Release the control button.
• Press and hold till the countdown ends.
• Release . This starts the Autoadjust.
With a successful Autoadjust, the parameters are stored automatically and the positioner
returns to operating mode 1.1.
If an error occurs during Autoadjust, the action is terminated with an error message. In this
event, press and hold or for approximately three seconds. The unit switches to the
operating level, mode 1.3 (manual adjustment within the sensor range). Check the mount and, if
necessary, correct. Afterwards repeat the Autoadjust.
5. Set potential dead bands and tolerance bands.

This step is only required for critical (e.g., very small) actuators.
In a standard situation, it is not necessary.
1) The zero position is determined automatically and saved during Autoadjust (for linear actuators, counter-clockwise
(CTCLOCKW), and for rotary actuators, clockwise (CLOCKW)).
28 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Startup Operation
Pos: 16.4 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/A - C/Betriebsarten @ 19\mod_1206954579890_3101.doc @ 174040
7.1 Operating modes

Pos: 16.5 /Inbetriebnahme/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Betriebsarten @ 19\mod_1206954634953_3101.doc @ 174063
Selection from the operating level:

• Press and hold.
• Press and release rapidly as often as required. The selected operating mode is displayed.
• Release .
• The position is displayed in % or as a rotation angle.
Operating mode Mode indicator Position indicator

1.0 °C °C
% %
mA mA
Control mode1)
conf conf
with adaptation (the control parameter)
1.1 °C °C
% %
Control mode1)
mA mA
conf conf
without adaptation (the control parameter)
1.2 °C °C
% %
2) mA mA
Manual adjustment in the operating range.
3) conf conf
Adjust via or
1.3 °C °C
% %
2) mA mA
Manual adjustment in the sensor range.
3) conf conf
Adjust via or
1) Since self-optimization in operating mode 1.0 is subject to several factors during operation and mismatches could
result over a longer period, we recommend that this operating mode only be activated over several hours and be
followed by the mode 1.1.
2) Position not active.
3) For high speed mode: Press and simultaneously.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 29
Startup Operation
Pos: 16.7 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/P - R/Parametrierbeispiel @ 19\mod_1206958322640_3101.doc @ 174109
7.2 Sample parameters

Pos: 16.8 /Inbetriebnahme/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Parametrierbeispiel @ 19\mod_1206956355875_3101.doc @ 174086
"Change the zero position of the LCD screen from clockwise (CLOCKW) to counter-
clockwise stop (CTCLOCKW)"
Starting position: The positioner operates in mode 1.1 in the operating level.
1. Switch to the configuration level:
• Press and hold and simultaneously.
• Press briefly.
• Wait until the countdown goes from 3 to 0.
• Release and .
is displayed.
2. Switch to parameter group 3._:

• Press and hold and simultaneously.
• Press twice briefly.
is displayed.
• Release and .
is displayed.
3. Select parameter 3.2:

• Press and hold.
is displayed.
• Release .
4. Change parameter settings:

• Press briefly to select .
30 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Startup Operation
5. Switch to parameter 3.3 (Return to operating level) and save the new setup:
• Press and hold.
°C
%
mA
is displayed.
conf
• Release .
• Press briefly to select .
• Press and hold till the countdown goes from 3 to 0.
The new parameter setting is saved and the positioner automatically returns to the working level
and continues to run in the operating level that was active before calling up the configuration
level.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 31
Maintenance
Pos: 18.1 /Überschriften/1/V - Z/Wartung @ 10\mod_1181642125390_3101.doc @ 103817
8 Maintenance
Pos: 18.2 /Wartung / Reparatur/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC/Wartung @ 19\mod_1206962333812_3101.doc @ 174134
Important
In case of manipulation of non-explosion proof devices by the user, the warranty is no longer
valid for the device.
Note that the supplied instrument air must be free of oil, water and dust according to
DIN/ISO 8573-1 to ensure trouble-free operation.
Essentially no maintenance is required for the TZIDC-200 positioner.

We recommend that you regularly check the built-in filter for pollution.
Important
Perform a functional check of the emergency shutdown module (option) at least every 2 years.
Pos: 18.3 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/A - C/Auswechseln des Filtereinsatzes @ 12\mod_1186736735781_3101.doc @ 114734
8.1 Replacing the filter element

Pos: 18.4 /Wartung / Reparatur/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC/Auswechseln des Filtereinsatzes @ 19\mod_1206972528109_3101.doc @ 174253
1
2
3 M00316
Fig. 20: Air filter (sectional drawing)

1 Supply air 3 Screw plug
2 Filter screw 4 Air outlet
Important
Switch off the air supply before replacing the air filter element.
1. Switch off the air supply.

2. Remove the filter screw and pull out the filter element using tweezers (see 32).
Spare filter elements can be ordered from ABB Service.
3. Insert the new filter element and tighten the filter screw.
The TZIDC-200 positioner is ready to operate immediately after the filter element has been
replaced. No further measures (e.g., readjustment) are required.
4. Switch on the air supply.
32 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Maintenance
Pos: 18.6 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/D - F/Funktionsprüfung des Emergency-Shutdown-Moduls @ 19\mod_1207645702750_3101.doc @ 178718
8.2 Functional check for emergency shutdown module

Pos: 18.7 /Wartung / Reparatur/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Gefahr - Explosionsgefahr durch öffnen Gehäuse @ 20\mod_1208783941390_3101.doc @ 181387

To conduct a functional check, you must open the housing.
Never open the housing in a potentially explosive area.
Pos: 18.8 /Wartung / Reparatur/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Wichtig - Emergency-Shutdown-Modul TZIDC-200 @ 19\mod_1207834604343_3101.doc @ 179606
Important
When using the emergency shutdown module, a functional check must be performed at least
every two years.
Check that the unit is working properly according to DIN V 19250. Otherwise, the AK4
approval is no longer valid.
Pos: 18.9 /Wartung / Reparatur/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Funktionsprüfung des Emergency-Shutdown-Modul @ 20\mod_1208783789031_3101.doc @ 181199
Procedure:
Fig. 21: Slide switch for emergency shutdown module

Handle the housing cover carefully. If the sealing surface is damaged, the "Ex d" explosion
protection is no longer valid.
Place the housing cover only on a smooth and clean surface.
1. Open the housing cover.

2. Move the slide switch (1) from center position "On" to the upper and lower switch positions
("Off1" or "Off2"), and check whether the actuator is depressurized.
3. Reset the slide switch to the center position ("On") after the functional check.
4. Replace the housing cover.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 33
Technical data
Pos: 20.1 /Überschriften/1/S - U/Technische Daten @ 0\mod_1132904574837_3101.doc @ 3169
9 Technical data
Pos: 20.2 /==== Wechsel ein- auf zweispaltig ==== @ 0\mod_1130421847171_3101.doc @ 3828
Wechsel ein-auf zweispaltig
Pos: 20.3 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/D - F/Eingang @ 0\mod_1139395051468_3101.doc @ 3221 Pos: 20.7 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/S - U/Stellweg @ 10\mod_1176215894234_3101.doc @ 77679
9.1 Input 9.3 Travel

Pos: 20.4 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Eingang / Stellsignal (Zweileitertechnik) @ 10\mod_1176272560140_3101.doc @ 77936 Pos: 20.8 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Stellweg / Drehwinkel @ 17\mod_1202462413187_3101.doc @ 156386
Output signal (two-wire technology) Rotation angle

Nominal range 4 ... 20 mA Used range 25 ... 120 (rotary actuators,
Split range configuration optional 270°)
20 ... 100 % 25 ... 60 ° (linear actuators)
between
of the nominal range Travel limit Min. and max. limits, freely
configurable between
Max. 50 mA
0 ... 100 % of total travel (min.
Min. 3.6 mA range > 20 %)
Starting at 3.8 mA Travel time prolongation Range of 0 ... 200 s, separately
Load voltage at 20 mA 9.7 V for each direction
Impedance at 20 mA 485 Dead band time limit Setting range 0 ... 200 s
(monitoring parameter for
Digital input control until the deviation
Control voltage 0 ... 5 V DC reaches the dead band)
logical switching state "0" Pos: 20.9 /======= Spaltenumbruch ======== @ 0\mod_1132937966324_3101.doc @ 3831
11 ... 30 V DC
Pos: 20.10 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/J - L/Luftversorgung @ 10\mod_1176215914875_3101.doc @ 77700
logical switching state "1" 9.4 Air supply

Current max. 4 mA Pos: 20.11 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Technische Daten/Luftversorgung TZIDC-2x0 @ 10\mod_1180951671703_3101.doc @ 101588
Instrument air free of oil, water and dust acc.

Pos: 20.5 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/A - C/Ausgang @ 10\mod_1176215873937_3101.doc @ 77658
to DIN / ISO 8573-1
pollution and oil content
9.2 Output according to Class 3 (purity:
Pos: 20.6 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Ausgang / Druckluftausgang @ 10\mod_1176272620812_3101.doc @ 77957
max. particle size: 5 µm, max.

Compressed air output
particle density: 5 mg / m3; oil
Range 0 ... 6 bar (0 ... 90 psi) content: max. concentration: 1
Air capacity 5.0 kg/h = 3.9 Nm³/h = 2.3 sfcm mg / m3; pressure dew point:
10 K below operating
at 1.4 bar (20 psi) supply pressure temperature
Supply pressure 1.4 ... 6 bar (20 ... 90 psi)
13 kg/h = 10 Nm³/h = 6.0 sfcm
at 6 bar (90 psi) supply pressure Note: Do not exceed the max.
operating pressure of the
Output function For single or double-acting actuator!
actuators, air is vented from
Air consumption < 0.1 kg/h / 0.05 scfm
actuator or actuator is blocked in
(independent of supply
case of (electrical) power failure
pressure)
Shut-off values End position 0 % = 0 ... 45 %
End position 100 % = 55 ... 100 %
Digital output (control circuit to DIN 19234/NAMUR)

Supply voltage 5 ... 11 V DC
Current > 0.35 mA … < 1.2 mA Switching state logical "0"
Current > 2.1 mA Switching state logical "1"
Effective direction (configurable) normally logical "0" or logical "1"
34 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Technical data
Pos: 20.12 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/S - U/Übertragungsdaten und Einflussgrößen @ 10\mod_1176215939812_3101.doc @ 77721 Pos: 20.17 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/G - I/Gehäuse @ 10\mod_1176216027484_3101.doc @ 77763
9.5 Transmission data and influences 9.7 Housing

Pos: 20.13 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Übertragungsdaten und Einflussgrößen @ 17\mod_1202462471968_3101.doc @ 156411 Pos: 20.18 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Gehäuse TZIDC-200 @ 10\mod_1176708472718_3101.doc @ 82221
Output Y1 Material/Protections
Increasing Increasing output signal 0 ... 100 % Aluminum, protection class IP 65 / NEMA 4X
Increasing pressure at output
Surface/color
Decreasing Increasing output signal 0 ... 100 %
Electrostatic dipping varnish with epoxy resin, stove-hardened. Case
Decreasing pressure at output varnished black, RAL 9005, matte, housing cover Pantone 420.
Action (output signal) Electrical connections

Increasing Signal 4 ... 20 mA = Screw terminals: Max. 1.0 mm2 for options,
actuator position 0 ... 100 % Max. 2.5 mm2 for analog signal.
Decreasing Signal 20 ... 4 mA = Note: Do not expose the terminals to strain.
actuator position 0 ... 100 % Cable entry: 2 tap holes 1/2-14 NPT or
Characteristic curve (travel = f {signal}) M20 x `1.5 (cable gland or pipe plug must be
ordered separately)
Linear, equal percentage 1:25 or 1:50 or 25:1 or 50:1 and freely
configurable with 20 reference points.
Pneumatic connections
Deviation < 0,5 %
Threads G 1/4 or 1/4-18 NPT
Tolerance band 0.3 ... 10 %, adjustable
Dead band 0.1 ... 10 %, adjustable
Weight
Resolution (A/D conversion) > 16000 steps
3.0 kg (1.36 lb)
Sample rate 20 ms
Influence of ambient temperature < 0.5 % per 10 K Mounting orientation
Influence of vibration < 1 % to 10 g and 80 Hz any orientation allowed
Seismic vibration
Meets requirements of DIN / IEC 68-3-3 Class III for strong and Dimensions
strongest earthquakes. see dimensional drawings
Influence of mounting orientation

Pos: 20.19 /======= Spaltenumbruch ======== @ 0\mod_1132937966324_3101.doc @ 3831
Pos: 20.20 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/S - U/Sicherheitsintegritätslevel @ 10\mod_1176216055937_3101.doc @ 77784
Not measurable. 9.8 Safety Integrity Level

Complies with the following directives Pos: 20.21 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Sicherheitsintegritätslevel @ 17\mod_1202462527078_3101.doc @ 156436
Important
- EMC Directive 89 / 336 / EWG as of May 1989
Applies to applications with single-acting and depressurizing
- EC Directive for CE conformity marking pneumatics.
Communication The positioner TZIDC-200 and the emergency shutdown module for
- HART Protocol 5.9 TZIDC-200 meet the requirements regarding:
- Local connector for LKS (not in Ex area) - functional safety acc. to IEC 61508
- HART communication via 20 mA signal line with (optional) FSK - explosion protection (depending on the model)
modem - electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with EN 61000
Pos: 20.15 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/J - L/Klimatische Beanspruchung @ 10\mod_1176215985578_3101.doc @ 77742

Without the input signal, the pneumatic module in the positioner vents
the drive and the installed spring in it moves the valve in a
9.6 Environmental capabilities predetermined end position (OPEN or CLOSED).
Pos: 20.16 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/Allgemein/Technische Daten/Klimatische Beanspruchung @ 10\mod_1176272943953_3101.doc @ 78041 SIL specific safety-related characteristics:
Ambient temperature
For operation, storage and -40 … 85 °C (-40 ... 185 °F) Device SFF PFDav dd + du
transport: s
When using proximity switches -25 … 85 °C (-13 ... 185 °F) TZIDC / TZIDC-200 as 94 % 1.76 * 10-4 718 FIT 40 FIT
SJ2-S1N (NO): shutdown module
Relative humidity TZIDC / TZIDC-200 with 94 % 1.76 * 10-4 651 FIT 40 FIT
supply current 0 mA
Operational (with closed housing 95 % (annual average),
and air supply switched on): condensation permissible For details refer to the Management Summary in the SIL-Safety
Instructions 37/18-79XA.
Transport and storage: 75 % (annual average), non- Pos: 20.22 /======= Spaltenumbruch ======== @ 0\mod_1132937966324_3101.doc @ 3831
condensing
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 35
Technical data
Pos: 20.23 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/D - F/Explosionsschutz @ 10\mod_1176216136218_3101.doc @ 77805
9.9 Explosion protection

Pos: 20.24 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Explosionsschutz TZIDC-200 @ 10\mod_1176711825609_3101.doc @ 82410
anke
Important IECEx Ex ib IIC T6

The values indicated here are taken from the respective Prototype test certificate: IECEx TUN 04.0015X, Issue no.:
approval certificates. 0
Always observe the specifications and supplements in the
Type: Intrinsic Safety
certificates.
(see operating instructions). Temperature class: T4, T5, T6
FM Approval HLC 8/02 3010829 Permissible ambient T4: -40 °C < Tamb < 85 °C
Flameproof; enclosure 4X; T5, max. 82 °C temperature:
CL I; Div 1; Grp. C-D T5: -40 °C < Tamb < 50 °C
Intrinsic Safety; enclosure 4X; T5, max. 82 °C T6: -40 °C < Tamb < 35 °C
CL I, II, III; Div 1; Grp. A-B-C-D-E-F-G
Non-incendive, enclosure 4X; T4, max. 85 °C
CL I; Div 2; Grp. A-B-C-D
CL II, III; Div 2; Grp. F-G
Dust-ignition Proof; enclosure 4X; T5, max. 82 °C
CL II, III; Div 1; Grp. E-F-G
CSA Certification 1393920

Flameproof; enclosure 4X; T5, max. 85 °C
CL I; Div 1; Grp. C-D
CL II; Div 1; Grp. E-F-G
CL III
Intrinsic Safety; enclosure 4X; T5, max. 82 °C
CL I; Div 1; Grp. A-B-C-D
CL II; Div 1; Grp. E-F-G
CL III
ATEX / GOST Russia / II 2G EEx d II C T4/T5/T6

GOST Ukraine
Prototype test certificate: DMT 02 ATEX E 029 X
Type: Flameproof enclosure
Device class: II 2G (EEx ib IIC)

Temperature class: T4, T5, T6
Permissible ambient T4: -40 °C < Tamb < 85 °C
temperature:
T5: -40 °C < Tamb < 80 °C
T6: -40 °C < Tamb < 65 °C
ATEX II 2G EEx ib IIC T6

Prototype test certificate: TÜV 98 ATEX 1370 X
Type: Intrinsic Safety equipment
Device class: II 2G (EEx ib IIC)

Temperature class: T4, T5, T6
Permissible ambient T4: -40 °C < Tamb < 85 °C
temperature:
T5: -40 °C < Tamb < 50 °C
T6: -40 °C < Tamb < 35 °C
36 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Technical data
Pos: 20.25 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/M - O/Optionen @ 10\mod_1176216171890_3101.doc @ 77826
9.10 Options
Pos: 20.26 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Optionen TZIDC-200 @ 17\mod_1202462941578_3101.doc @ 156460
juhu
Module for analog position feedback1) Digital position feedback with proximity switches
Signal range 4 ... 20 mA (configurable split Two proximity switches for independent position signaling. Switching
ranges) points adjustable between 0 … 100 %
Supply, 2-wire circuitry 24 V DC (10 ... 30 V DC) Current circuits acc. to DIN 19234 / NAMUR
48 V DC (20 ... 48 V DC, no ignition Supply voltage 5 ... 11 V DC
protection)
Signal current < 1.2 mA Switching state logical “0“
Characteristic curve Rising or falling
(configurable) Signal current > 2.1 mA Switching state logical “1“
Deviation <1%
Direction of action (logical state)
Important Position
Without a signal from the positioner (e.g., “no energy” or Proximity switch < Lim. 1 > Lim. 1 < Lim. 2 > Lim. 2
“initializing”) the module sets the output to > 20 mA (alarm
level) SJ2-SN (NC) 0 1 1 0
SJ2-S1N (NO) 1 0 0 1
Module for digital position feedback1)
Two switches for digital position feedback (position adjustable within
Important
the range of 0 ... 100 %, ranges cannot overlap)
When using proximity switch SJ2_S1N (NO), the
Current circuits acc. to DIN 19234 / NAMUR positionerTZIDC-200 may only be used at an ambient
temperature range
Supply voltage 5 ... 11 V DC -25 ... 85 °C (-13 ... 185 °F).
Signal current < 1.2 mA Switching state logical “0“
Digital position feedback with 24 V microswitches
Signal current > 2.1 mA Switching state logical “1“
Important
Direction of action normally logical “0“ or logical “1“
(configurable) Only approved for Ex d version!
Module for the emergency shutdown function2)

Two microswitches for independent position signaling. Switching
Supply voltage 24 V DC (20 ... 30 V DC)
points adjustable between 0 … 100 %.
(galvanically isolated from input
signal) Voltage max. 24 V AC / DC
Safe position is activated Voltage < 5 V
when Load rating max. 2 A
Explosion protection see certificate (operating Contact surface 10 µm Gold (AU)
instructions)
SIL See "Safety Integrity Level"
Mechanical position indicator
Indicator disk in enclosure cover, linked with positioner feedback
A separate 24 V DC signal is normally applied to the emergency
shaft through magnetic coupling.
shutdown module, which connects through the signal from the
microprocessor to the I/P module.
When the 24 V DC signal is interrupted, the pneumatic module Important
executes the respective safety function, depending on the These options are also available for retrofitting by Service.
mechanical construction:
The positioner output 1 is depressurized, and the valve is moved to

the safe position. In case of a double-acting actuator the second
output 2 is additionally pressurized.
Important
The emergency shutdown module can only be used with
pneumatics with the safe position “fail-safe”.
The emergency shutdown module works independently of the mother

board, i.e. all information from the final control element is available in
the supervisory process control system at any time.
1) The module for analog position feedback and the module for
digital position feedback plug in separate slots and can be used
together.
2) The module for the emergency shutdown function uses the same
space as the module for analog feedback and the module for
analog or digital feedback and cannot be plugged in and run
together with any of them.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 37
Technical data
Pos: 20.28 /Überschriften/1.1/2-spaltig/V - Z/Zubehör @ 10\mod_1176216204812_3101.doc @ 77847
9.11 Accessories
Pos: 20.29 /Technische Daten / Datenblatt/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC / TZIDC-200/Technische Daten/Zubehör TZIDC-200 @ 10\mod_1176713261968_3101.doc @ 82461
Mounting material
Attachment kit for linear actuators to DIN/IEC 534 / NAMUR
Attachment kit for rotary actuators to VDI/VDE 3845
Attachment kit for integral mounting to control valves
Attachment kit for actuator-specific attachment upon request
EEx d cable glands

Cable gland and pipe plug approved for Ex d, securing adhesive
Pressure gauge block

With pressure gauges for supply and output pressure. Pressure
gauges with housing ø 28 mm (1,10 inch), with connection block in
aluminum, black with installation material for mounting toTZIDC-200.
Filter regulator
All metal version in brass, varnished black, bronze filter element,
40 µm, with condensate drain.
max. pre-pressure 16 bar (232 psi), output adjustable to 1,4 ... 6 bar
(20,31 ... 87,02 psi)
PC adapter for communication

LKS adapter f. plug conn. to TZIDC-200
FSK modem for HART communication
(see data sheet 63_6.71)
PC software for remote configuration and operation

DSV401 (SMART VISION) with DTM for TZIDC/TZIDC-200 available
on CD ROM (see data sheet 63_1.20)
Pos: 20.30 /==== Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ==== @ 0\mod_1130421955859_3101.doc @ 3829
38 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
Pos: 22.1 /Überschriften/1/A - C/Anhang @ 0\mod_1132904773022_3101.doc @ 3134
10 Appendix
Pos: 22.2 /Überschriften/1.1/1-spaltig/V - Z/Zulassungen und Zertifizierungen @ 0\mod_1132230068395_3101.doc @ 3806
10.1 Permits and certifications

Pos: 22.3 /Anhang/Allgemein/Zulassungen und Zertifizierungen (CE) @ 18\mod_1205231786867_3101.doc @ 169127
Zu
Symbol Description
CE mark By placing the CE mark on the model plate, ABB Automation Products GmbH
declares its conformance with the following directives:
- EMC directive 89/336/EEC.
- Machinery directive 2006/42/EC
Ex approvals By placing the Ex mark on the name plate, ABB Automation Products GmbH also
declares its conformance with the following directive:
- ATEX directive 94/9/EC
Pos: 22.5 /Anhang/Allgemein/Hinweis zum Download-Bereich (Aktorik) @ 10\mod_1182172251781_3101.doc @ 107696
Important
All documentation, declarations of conformity and certificates are available in the download
area of ABB.
www.abb.com/instrumentation
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 39
Appendix
Pos: 22.7 /Zertifikate/Aktorik/Stellungsregler/TZIDC-200/Zertifikate TZIDC-200 @ 20\mod_1208873918171_3101.doc @ 181931
0
40 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 41
Appendix
42 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 43
Appendix
44 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 45
Appendix
46 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 47
Appendix
48 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 49
Appendix
50 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
Important
The 7th addendum to the certificate TÜV 98 ATEX 1370 X is provided here since supplements
2 to 6 do not contain information relevant to this operating manual.
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 51
Appendix
52 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 53
Appendix
54 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 55
Appendix
56 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 57
Appendix
58 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 59
Appendix
60 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 61
Appendix
62 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Appendix
Pos: 22.9 /Anhang/Allgemein/Rücksendeformular @ 0\mod_1132757486454_3101.doc @ 3820
Statement about the contamination of devices and components
The repair and/or maintenance of devices and components will only be performed when a completely filled out
explanation is present.
Otherwise, the shipment can be rejected. This explanation may only be filled out and signed by authorized
specialist personnel of the operator.
Customer details:
Company:
Address:
Contact person: Telephone:
Fax: E-Mail:
Device details:
Type: Serial no.:
Reason for the return/description of the defect:
Was this device used for working with substances which pose a threat or health risk?
e Yes e No
If yes, which type of contamination (please place an X next to the applicable items)
biological e corrosive/irritating e combustible (highly/extremely combustible) e
toxic e explosive e other harmful substances e
radioactive e
Which substances have had contact with the device?

1.
2.
3.
We hereby certify that the devices/parts shipped were cleaned and are free from any dangerous or poisonous
materials.
City, Date Signature and company stamp
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 63
Index
Pos: 24.1 /Überschriften/1/G - I/Index @ 0\mod_1138787046328_3101.doc @ 3151
11 Index
Pos: 24.2 /==== Wechsel ein- auf zweispaltig ==== @ 0\mod_1130421847171_3101.doc @ 3828
Pos: 24.3 /Inhaltsverzeichnis/Index @ 0\mod_1138784494500_3101.doc @ 3128
A Mechanical mount....................................................12
Actuator stroke, adjust .............................................18 Mechanical position indicator...................................25
Appendix ..................................................................39 Minimum angle.........................................................18
Autoadjust ................................................................28 Mounting kit..............................................................14
C Mounting on linear actuators ...................................14
Cable entry...............................................................24 Mounting on rotary actuator.....................................19
CE mark ...................................................................39 N
Communication interface .........................................22 Name plate.................................................................7
Control mode ...........................................................29 O
D Operating conditions at installation site ...................12
Dead band ...............................................................28 Operating mode .......................................................29
Design and function .................................................11 Operating modes ...............................................25, 29
Disposal .....................................................................8 Operating range .................................................12, 27
Downloads ...............................................................39 Operating safety information....................................10
E Operator liability .........................................................7
Electrical connection................................................22 P
Electrical installation safety information.....................9 Permits and certifications.........................................39
EMC directive...........................................................39 Personnel qualification...............................................7
Explosion-protection safety precautions..................10 Pipe connection .......................................................27
F Piping connections...................................................27
Functional check for emergency shutdown module 33 Pneumatic connection .............................................26
G Position indicator......................................................29
General ....................................................................12 Proper use .................................................................5
General Safety Information........................................5 R
I Replacing the filter element .....................................32
Ignition protection approvals....................................39 Returning devices ......................................................8
Input .........................................................................34 Rotation angle..........................................................28
Installation................................................................12 S
Installation location ..................................................12 Safety.........................................................................5
Installation safety information ....................................9 Sample parameters..................................................30
Instrument air ...........................................................26 Screw terminal assignments....................................23
L Sensor range ...........................................................13
Labels and symbols ...................................................6 Setpoint current........................................................28
M Setting the mechanical feedback.............................25
Maintenance ............................................................32 Startup Operation.....................................................28
Mechanical digital feedback with proximity switches Storage conditions .....................................................9
.............................................................................25
Symbols and warnings...............................................6
Mechanical feedback with microswitches for 24 V ..25
64 TZIDC-200 42/18-80-EN
Index
T W
Technical data..........................................................34 Warranty provision .....................................................6
Technical limits ..........................................................5 WEEE directive ..........................................................8
Tolerance band ........................................................28 Z
Transport safety information ......................................8 Zero position ............................................................30
Pos: 24.4 /==== Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ==== @ 0\mod_1130421955859_3101.doc @ 3829

Pos: 25 /Rückseiten/Minden_Aktorik @ 2\mod_1151575081640_3101.doc @ 32243
===== Ende der Stückliste =====
42/18-80-EN TZIDC-200 65
ABB has Sales & Customer Support The Company’s policy is one of continuous product
expertise in over 100 countries worldwide. improvement and the right is reserved to modify the
information contained herein without notice.
Printed in the Fed. Rep. of Germany (06.2008)
© ABB 2008
42/18-80-EN Rev. E
3KXE341001R4201
ABB Limited ABB Inc. ABB Automation Products GmbH

Salterbeck Trading Estate 125 E. County Line Road Schillerstr. 72
Workington, Cumbria Warminster, PA 18974 32425 Minden
CA14 5DS USA Germany
UK Tel: +1 215 674 6000 Tel: +49 551 905-534
Tel: +44 (0)1946 830 611 Fax: +1 215 674 7183 Fax: +49 551 905-555
Fax: +44 (0)1946 832 661 CCC-support.deapr@de.abb.com
Configuration-, Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Parameterization TZIDC / TZIDC-200
Instruction
45/18-79-EN
• Software revision 3.00

Blinder Text
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
TZIDC / TZIDC-200
Configuration-, Parameterization Instruction

45/18-79-EN
03.2009
Rev. B
Manufacturer:
Schillerstraße 72
32425 Minden
Germany
Tel.: +49 551 905-534
Fax: +49 551 905-555
CCC-support.deapr@de.abb.com

Subject to changes without notice
This document is protected by copyright. It assists the user in safe and efficient operation of the device.
The contents of this document, whether whole or in part, may not be copied or reproduced without prior
approval by the copyright holder.
Contents
2 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Contents
1 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................................6
1.1 General information and notes for the reader ................................................................................................6
1.2 Intended use...................................................................................................................................................6
1.3 Plates and symbols ........................................................................................................................................7
1.3.1 Safety/warning symbols, note symbols...................................................................................................7
1.4 Target groups and qualifications ....................................................................................................................8
1.5 Explosion protection .......................................................................................................................................9
2 Local operation..................................................................................................................................................11
2.1 General.........................................................................................................................................................11
2.2 Displays and operating elements .................................................................................................................12
2.2.1 Functions on the operating level ...........................................................................................................14
2.2.2 Functions on the configuration level .....................................................................................................15
2.3 Operation on the operating level ..................................................................................................................17
2.4 Operating modes..........................................................................................................................................18
2.4.1 Operating mode 1.0: Adaptive control ..................................................................................................18
2.4.2 Operating mode 1.1: Fixed control........................................................................................................18
2.4.3 Operating mode 1.2: Manual adjustment within the stroke range ........................................................19
2.4.4 Operating mode 1.3: Manual adjustment within the sensor range .......................................................20
2.5 Inhibiting operation .......................................................................................................................................21
3 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................................22
3.1 General information......................................................................................................................................22
3.2 Parameter overview (table) ..........................................................................................................................23
3.3 Parameter overview (figure) .........................................................................................................................25
3.4 Parameter group 1: Standard.......................................................................................................................26
3.4.1 P1.0 Actuator type.................................................................................................................................26
3.4.2 P1.1 Autoadjust.....................................................................................................................................27
3.4.3 P1.2 Autoadjust.....................................................................................................................................29
3.4.4 P1.3 Test ...............................................................................................................................................29
3.4.5 P1.4 Return to operating level ..............................................................................................................30
3.5 Parameter group 2: Setpoint ........................................................................................................................31
3.5.1 P2.0 Minimum of setpoint range ...........................................................................................................31
3.5.2 P2.1 Max. of setpoint range ..................................................................................................................31
3.5.3 P2.2 Characteristic curve ......................................................................................................................32
3.5.4 P2.3 Action (positioning signal).............................................................................................................32
3.5.5 P 2.4 Shut-off value 0% ........................................................................................................................33
3.5.6 P 2.5 Shut-off value 100% ....................................................................................................................33
3.5.7 P2.6 Setpoint ramp (up) ........................................................................................................................34
3.5.8 P2.7 Setpoint ramp (down) ...................................................................................................................34
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 3

Contents
3.6 Parameter group 3: Operating range ...........................................................................................................36
3.6.1 P3.0 Minimum of operating range.........................................................................................................36
3.6.2 P3.1 Maximum operating range............................................................................................................37
3.6.3 P3.2 Zero position .................................................................................................................................37
3.7 Parameter group 4: Messages.....................................................................................................................39
3.7.1 P4.0 Dead band time limit .....................................................................................................................39
3.7.2 P4.1 Switching point SW1.....................................................................................................................39
3.7.3 P4.2 Switching point SW2.....................................................................................................................40
3.7.4 P4.3 Active direction SW1.....................................................................................................................40
3.7.5 P4.4 Active direction SW2.....................................................................................................................40
3.8 Parameter group 5: Alarms ..........................................................................................................................42
3.8.1 P5.0 Leakage to actuator ......................................................................................................................42
3.8.2 P5.1 Setpoint time-out...........................................................................................................................42
3.8.3 P5.2 Operating range exceeded ...........................................................................................................42
3.8.4 P5.3 Controller inactive .........................................................................................................................43
3.8.5 P5.4 Positioning time-out ......................................................................................................................43
3.8.6 P5.5 Movement counter ........................................................................................................................44
3.8.7 P5.6 Travel counter...............................................................................................................................44
3.9 Parameter group 6: Manual adjustment.......................................................................................................45
3.9.1 P6.0 Minimum of operating range.........................................................................................................45
3.9.2 P6.1 Maximum operating range............................................................................................................46
3.9.3 P6.2 Actuator type.................................................................................................................................47
3.9.4 P6.3 Spring action (Y2) .........................................................................................................................47
3.9.5 P6.5 Dead Angle Open .........................................................................................................................48
3.9.6 P6.4 Dead Angle Close.........................................................................................................................48
3.10 Parameter group 7: Control parameters ......................................................................................................49
3.10.1 P7.0 KP value (up) ................................................................................................................................49
3.10.2 P7.1 KP value (down) ...........................................................................................................................50
3.10.3 P7.2 TV value (up) ................................................................................................................................51
3.10.4 P7.3 TV value (down)............................................................................................................................52
3.10.5 P7.4 Y offset (up) ..................................................................................................................................53
3.10.6 P7.5 Y offset (down)..............................................................................................................................54
3.10.7 P7.6 Tolerance band.............................................................................................................................55
3.10.8 P7.7 Dead band ....................................................................................................................................55
3.10.9 P7.8 Dead-band approach ....................................................................................................................55
3.10.10 P7.9 Test ...............................................................................................................................................56
4 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Contents
3.10.11 P7.10 Return to operating level ............................................................................................................56
3.11 Parameter group 8: Analog output ...............................................................................................................57
3.11.1 P8.0 Minimum of current range.............................................................................................................57
3.11.2 P8.1 Maximum of current range............................................................................................................57
3.11.3 P8.2 Valve action ..................................................................................................................................57
3.11.4 P8.3 Alarm message.............................................................................................................................58
3.11.5 P8.4 Count back characteristic curve ...................................................................................................58
3.11.6 P8.5 Test ...............................................................................................................................................58
3.12 Parameter group 9: Digital output ................................................................................................................60
3.12.1 P9.0 Signal level digital outputs ............................................................................................................60
3.12.2 P9.1 Signal level SW1...........................................................................................................................60
3.12.3 P9.2 Signal level SW2...........................................................................................................................60
3.12.4 P9.3 Test ...............................................................................................................................................61
3.13 Parameter group 10: Digital input ................................................................................................................62
3.13.1 P10.0 Digital input .................................................................................................................................62
3.14 Parameter group 11: Safe position ..............................................................................................................64
3.14.1 P11.0 Safe position ...............................................................................................................................64
3.14.2 P11.1 Factory settings ..........................................................................................................................64
3.14.3 P11.2 I/P module type...........................................................................................................................65
4 Error messages .................................................................................................................................................67
4.1 Error codes...................................................................................................................................................67
4.2 Alarm codes .................................................................................................................................................70
4.3 Message codes ............................................................................................................................................72
4.4 Error handling TZIDC / TZIDC-200 ..............................................................................................................73
4.4.1 Oscillation problem................................................................................................................................73
4.4.2 No function ............................................................................................................................................74
5 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................75
5.1 Additional documents ...................................................................................................................................75
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 5

Safety
1 Safety
1.1 General information and notes for the reader
Read these instructions carefully prior to installing and commissioning the device.
These instructions are an important part of the product and must be kept for later use.
These instructions are intended as an overview and do not contain detailed information on all
designs for this product or every possible aspect of installation, operation and maintenance.
For additional information or in case specific problems occur that are not discussed in these
instructions, contact the manufacturer.
The content of these instructions is neither part of any previous or existing agreement, promise
or legal relationship nor is it intended to change the same.
This product is built based on state-of-the-art technology and is operationally safe. It has been
tested and left the factory in a safe, maintenance-free state. The information in the manual must
be observed and followed in order to maintain this state throughout the period of operation.
Modifications and repairs to the product may only be performed if expressly permitted by these
instructions.
Only by observing all of the safety information and all safety/warning symbols in these
instructions can optimum protection of both personnel and the environment, as well as safe and
fault-free operation of the device, be ensured.
Information and symbols directly on the product must be observed. They may not be removed
and must be fully legible at all times.
1.2 Intended use

TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioners are electro-pneumatic positioning devices for use with
pneumatically controlled actuators. They are intended for mounting on linear and rotary
actuators according to instructions in these operating instructions. The device may only be used
for the applications listed in these operating instructions and in the data sheet. All other use is
improper use.
The signal circuit as well as the input and output wiring must comply with the specified
explosion protection (see "Certificates” in the appendix of the operating instructions).
The maximum allowable ambient temperature range from -40 °C to 85 °C (-40 ... 185 °F) (for
type SJ2-S1N (NO) proximity switches) -25 … 85 °C (-13 … 185 °F)) may not be exceeded.
Repairs, alterations, and enhancements, or the installation of replacement parts, are only
permissible insofar as these are described in the manual. Approval by ABB Automation
Products GmbH must be sought for any activities beyond this scope. Repairs performed by
ABB-authorized specialist shops are excluded from this.
6 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Safety
1.3 Plates and symbols
1.3.1 Safety/warning symbols, note symbols
DANGER – <Serious damage to health / risk to life>
This symbol in conjunction with the signal word "Danger" indicates an imminent danger.
Failure to observe this safety information will result in death or severe injury.
DANGER – <Serious damage to health / risk to life>

This symbol in conjunction with the signal word "Danger" indicates an imminent electrical
hazard. Failure to observe this safety information will result in death or severe injury.
WARNING – <Bodily injury>

This symbol in conjunction with the signal word “Warning“ indicates a possibly dangerous
situation. Failure to observe this safety information may result in death or severe injury.
WARNING – <Bodily injury>
This symbol in conjunction with the signal word "Warning" indicates a potential electrical
hazard. Failure to observe this safety information may result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION – <Minor injury>

This symbol in conjunction with the signal word “Caution“ indicates a possibly dangerous
situation. Failure to observe this safety information may result in minor or moderate injury.
This may also be used for property damage warnings.
ATTENTION – <Property damage>!

The symbol indicates a potentially damaging situation.
Failure to observe this safety information may result in damage to or destruction of the product
and/or other system components.
IMPORTANT (NOTICE)
This symbol indicates operator tips, particularly useful information, or important information
about the product or its further uses. It does not indicate a dangerous or damaging situation.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 7

Safety
1.4 Target groups and qualifications
Installation, commissioning, and maintenance of the product may only be performed by trained
specialist personnel who have been authorized by the plant operator to do so. The specialist
personnel must have read and understood the manual and comply with its instructions.
Prior to using corrosive and abrasive materials for measurement purposes, the operator must
check the level of resistance of all parts coming into contact with the materials to be measured.
ABB Automation Products GmbH will gladly support you in selecting the materials, but cannot
accept any liability in doing so.
The operators must strictly observe the applicable national regulations with regards to
installation, function tests, repairs, and maintenance of electrical products.
8 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Safety
1.5 Explosion protection
Depending on the type of explosion protection, one of the following model plates is attached to
the left of the positioner beside the main model plate. It shows the explosion protection and your
device’s applicable EX certificate. More detailed information about your device can be found
under “Certificates” in the appendix to the operating instructions.
Warning - General hazards!

Always observe your device’s applicable technical data and the special conditions in
accordance with the applicable certificate.
Fig. 1 Explosion protection information on the TZIDC model plates
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 9

Safety
Fig. 2 Explosion protection information on the TZIDC-200 model plates
10 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Local operation
2 Local operation
2.1 General
The TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner features two operating levels:
Operating level
On the operating level the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner operates in one of four possible
operating modes (two for automatic control and two for manual adjustment). Parameters cannot
be changed or saved on this level.
Configuration level
On this level most of the parameters of the positioner can be changed locally. The PC is
required to change the limit values for the movement counter, the travel counter, and the user-
defined characteristic curve.
Caution - Warning!
During external configuration via a PC, the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner no longer responds
to the position demand signal. Prior to external configuration always move the actuator to the
safe position and activate manual adjustment.
To simplify operation, the parameters have been categorized in parameter groups through
which you can navigate by means of push buttons (see the section “Displays and operating
elements”).
On the configuration level the active operating mode is deactivated. The I/P module is in neutral
position. The control operation is inactive.
See the chapter “Configuration” for a detailed description of the individual parameter groups.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 11

Local operation
2.2 Displays and operating elements
TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioners can be operated locally by means of four push buttons and a
liquid crystal display.
Liquid crystal display
The liquid crystal display with 160 segments has been specially designed for the TZIDC /
TZIDC-200 positioner.
Important
The display has been designed for a temperature range of -25 °C to 80 °C (-13°F to +176°F).
At temperatures outside this range the display is too sluggish and will be switched off.
o
C
%
mA
conf
2 3
Fig. 3: Liquid crystal display
1 Value display, with unit 3 Designator display
2 Symbol display
Symbol display
The operating modes of the positioner are indicated by the following four symbols.
Symbol Description
The key icon indicates that operation or access is restricted.
The control loop icon indicates that the control loop is active. The symbol is
displayed when the positioner is normally in operating mode 1.0 CTRL_ADP
(adaptive control) or 1.1 CTRL_FIX (fixed control). On the configuration level there
are test functions for which the controller will be active as well. The control loop
symbol will also be displayed when these functions are active.
The hand icon indicates manual adjustment. The symbol is displayed when the
positioner is operating on the operating level in operating mode 1.2 MANUAL
(manual adjustment within the stroke range) or 1.3 MAN_SENS (manual
adjustment within the sensor range). On the configuration level, manual adjustment
is active when setting the valve range limits (parameter P6.0 MIN_VR (min. of
valve range) and P6.1 MAX_VR (max. of valve range). The symbol will also be
displayed when these parameters are being set.
conf The Configuration icon indicates that the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is in the
configuration level. The control operation is inactive.
12 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Local operation
Value display with unit

This 7-segment display with four digits indicates parameter values or parameter reference
numbers. For values, the physical unit (°C, %, mA) is also displayed.
Designator display
This 14-segment display with eight digits indicates the designators of the parameters with their
status, of the parameter groups, and of the operating modes.
Push buttons
The four push buttons ENTER, MODE, ↑ and ↓ are pressed individually or in certain
combinations according to the function desired.
ENTER
MODE
Fig. 4: Push buttons
Basic functions
Push button Description

ENTER • To acknowledge a message
• Starting an action
• Save in the non-volatile memory
MODE • Choose operating mode (operating level)
• Select parameter group or parameter (configuration level)
• UP direction button
• DOWN direction button
Press and hold all • Reset
four buttons for 5 s
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 13

Local operation
2.2.1 Functions on the operating level
Changing the mode (operating level)
1. Press and hold MODE.
The reference number (top) and the designator (bottom) of the active
mode are displayed.
2. Additionally, press or until the reference number and the
designator of the desired mode are indicated in the display.
3. Release the buttons.
Important
The desired mode is only activated and saved in the non-volatile memory
after releasing the MODE button.
Adjusting the contrast (operating level)

1. Press and hold ENTER.
After approx. 1.5 seconds the display switches to the contrast value.
2. Additionally, press or to change the contrast.
The value selected is active immediately so that you can check the
contrast in the display.
3. Release the buttons.
After releasing the ENTER button the value is saved in the non-volatile
memory.
Switching to the configuration level

1. Simultaneously press and hold the or buttons.
2. Briefly press and release ENTER. Press and hold and until the
countdown from 3 to 0 has been completed (time: appr. 3 seconds).
Important
If you release the direction buttons before the countdown is finished the
configuration level is not activated.
3. Release the buttons or .

The configuration level appears. The first parameter (P1.0) of group 1
STANDARD is displayed. The configuration symbol is also shown on
the display.
14 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Local operation
2.2.2 Functions on the configuration level
Switching to another parameter group
1. Simultaneously press and hold the MODE and ENTER buttons.
The display indicates the reference number (top) and the designator
(bottom) of the current parameter group of the positioner.
2. Additionally press or until the reference number and the
designator of the desired parameter group are displayed.
3. Release all buttons.
The first parameter of the newly selected parameter group is
displayed. The desired parameter can be adjusted within the group.
Selecting a parameter within a group

1. Press and hold MODE.
The display indicates the reference number (top) and the designator
(bottom) of the current parameter.
2. Additionally, press or until the reference number and the
designator of the desired parameter are displayed.
3. Release all buttons.
The display indicates the value of the selected parameter (top). At the
bottom the designator is still shown. For parameters that can assume
different states (e.g. ACTIVE or INACTIVE) the reference number is
displayed at the top and the state at the bottom. The value/state of the
parameter can be changed.
Changing a parameter
1. Press or until the desired value or state is shown.
Important
When keeping the respective direction button pressed, parameters with
values are changed dynamically. The change rate is increased every
second until the limit value of the parameter is reached.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 15

Local operation
Saving data and exiting the configuration level

1. Select the EXIT parameter for the respective parameter group and set
it to one of the two possible states using or :
NV_SAVE Activates your changes and saves them in the non-volatile
memory. The positioner returns to the operating level.
CANCEL Changes are discarded. The positioner returns to the
operating level.
Important
The parameters are only saved in the non-volatile memory by leaving the
configuration level via EXIT -> SAVE.
Multiple parameters in different groups can also be changed sequentially.
When leaving the last parameter group via EXIT -> SAVE, all previously
made modifications are saved and applied.
2. Press and hold ENTER until the displayed countdown from 3 to 0 is

finished.
3. Release the ENTER button.
The positioner returns to the operating level. The configuration level
was accessed from this mode.
Depending on the selection the data is saved in the non-volatile
memory or discarded. During the save operation a plausibility check is
performed. If an error occurs during the check or when data is being
saved, an error message is displayed (see the chapter “Error
messages").
Starting an action
1. Press and hold ENTER until the displayed countdown from 3 to 0 is
finished.
2. Release the ENTER button. The selected action is started.
Important
If you release ENTER before the countdown is finished the action is not
started.
16 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Local operation
To acknowledge a message %
°C
mA
In the course of some actions (e.g. Autoadjust) messages are displayed

co nf
that have to be acknowledged. Messages that must be acknowledged are
identified by the value display (top line) being empty (see adjacent Acknowledgement
example). required
Acknowledgement:
1. Briefly press ENTER. %
°C
mA
The TZIDC/C-200 positioner continues with the action and/or finishes

conf
the procedure.
No
acknowledgement
To cancel an action
1. Briefly press ENTER.
The TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner cancels the action in progress (e.g.
Autoadjust).
2.3 Operation on the operating level

In the operating level, the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner works in the selected operating mode.
There are four operating modes:
• 1.0 CTRL_ADP (Adaptive control)
• 1.1 CRTL_FIX (Fixed control)
• 1.2 MANUAL (Manual adjustment within the stroke range)
• 1.3 MAN_SENS (Manual operation within the sensor range)
For details regarding switching between the modes refer to the section “Functions in the
operating level”.
When the 4 ... 20 mA signal is fed in, the positioner automatically starts up in the previously
active mode. Devices from the factory start up in operating mode 1.3. This also applies to
devices that have been reset to the factory setting.
In both manual modes the valve can be adjusted manually by pressing or .
The two automatic control modes are indicated by the control loop symbol in the display. For
the manual modes the hand symbol is shown in the display.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 17

Local operation
2.4 Operating modes
2.4.1 Operating mode 1.0: Adaptive control
Controlling operation with automatic adaptation of the control °C
%
parameters mA
When operating the TZIDC/TZIDC-200 positioner in "adaptive mode" conf
P1.0 CTRL_ADP, the control parameters are automatically optimized to

the operating conditions in small increments. This is especially helpful if
valves and fittings could not be operated with reference conditions during
Autoadjust.
Since self-optimization in "adaptive mode" is subject to several
factors during operation and mismatches could result over a longer
period, we recommend that this operating mode only be activated
over several hours and be followed by the mode P1.1 CTRL_FIX.
°C
%
The valve position is indicated as a percentage of the operating range mA
(from 0 ... 100%). conf
2.4.2 Operating mode 1.1: Fixed control

Controlling operation with fixed parameters %
°C
mA
This is the normal recommended operating mode.

conf
In contrast to the operating mode P1.0 CTRL_ADP, the control parameters

are not automatically adjusted.
°C
The valve position is indicated as a percentage of the operating range %
mA
(from 0 ... 100%).

conf
Caution - Risk
No leakage monitoring.
In control modes 1.0 and 1.1, various values can be displayed in addition
to the current actuator position:
Setpoint display
°C
%
1. Press and hold the button. mA
The setpoint is displayed. conf
2. Briefly press ENTER as well.

The setpoint display is toggled between the setpoint current at the input
terminals in mA and the setpoint as a percentage of the stroke range.
18 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Local operation
Temperature display °C
%
mA
1. Press and hold the button.
conf
The temperature inside the case is displayed.
2. Briefly press ENTER as well.
3. The temperature display is toggled between °C and °F.
Display of control deviation
1. Press and hold the and buttons. %
°C
mA
The control deviation is displayed as a percentage (%) of the stroke conf
range.
2.4.3 Operating mode 1.2: Manual adjustment within the stroke range
The valve is adjusted manually using the direction buttons and within %
°C
mA
the stroke range.
conf
1. Press and hold the button for the desired direction.
2. Press the second arrow button to switch the device to high-speed
mode.
Caution - Risk
If air escapes due to a leakage and the actuator position changes, the
positioner will not automatically restore the setpoint.
Configured stroke limit positions and stroke times are not effective in the
manual mode.
In this operating mode the valve position is indicated as a percentage (%) °C

%
of the stroke range. mA
conf
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 19

Local operation
2.4.4 Operating mode 1.3: Manual adjustment within the sensor range
see operating mode 1.2 %
°C
mA
Unlike step 1.2, this operating mode is used to determine whether the conf
available detection range of the position sensor is used correctly after
mounting the positioner to the actuator. In this mode, the valve position is %
°C
indicated in angular degrees with respect to the sensor range (i.e. 0 ...140 mA
°). conf
Most parameters of the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner can be set locally,

so that configuring via the communication interface (LKS) or FSK modem
and a PC or hand-held terminal is only necessary occasionally.
You may also disable local modification and saving of parameters by
denying or restricting access to the configuration level.
20 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Local operation
2.5 Inhibiting operation
Configuration changes to the program in the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner can be inhibited
completely or partially via the digital input and the parameter 10.0 FUNCTION in parameter
group DIG_IN (digital input). This allows the user to prevent or restrict operating actions of
unauthorized personnel as desired. When operation is disabled in this way, the key symbol is
indicated in the display.
The following levels of configuration locks are possible:
Inhibiting the local configuration
Local operation on the operating level and remote operation and configuration via a PC are still
possible.
Inhibiting all local operating functions
No local operating actions can be executed. Both the operating level and the configuration level
are locked. Remote operation and setting of parameters via a PC is still possible.
Inhibiting local operation and remote configuration
The TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner can neither be operated or configured locally nor configured
remotely from a PC.
Important
This lock can only be deactivated when a voltage of 12 ... 24 V is applied to TZIDC / TZIDC-200
(see P10.0 Function selection).
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 21

Configuration
K
3 Configuration
3.1 General information
Most parameters of the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner can be set locally, so that configuring via
the communication interface (LKS) or FSK modem and a PC or hand-held terminal is only
necessary occasionally.
You may also disable local modification and saving of parameters by denying or restricting
access to the configuration level (see the section “Inhibiting operation” in the chapter “Local
operation” and the description of the parameter P10.0 Function selection).
To simplify the process, the different parameters are grouped as follows:
The following sections provide an overview in graphic and table formats of the overall structure
of the parameter groups and parameters.
ID Designator Name
P1._ STANDARD Standard
P2._ SETPOINT Setpoint
P3._ ACTUATOR Actuator
P4._ MESSAGES Messages
P5._ ALARMS Alarms
P6._ MAN_ADJ Manual adjustment
P7._ CTRL_PAR Control parameters
P8._ ANLG_OUT Analog output
P9._ DIG_OUT Digital output
P10._ DIG_IN Digital input
P11._ FS / IP Factory setting, I/P type
22 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.2 Parameter overview (table)
Param. Display Function Possible parameter settings Unit Factory set.
P1._ STANDARD
P1.0 ACTUATOR Actuator type LINEAR, ROTARY - LINEAR
P1.1 AUTO_ADJ Autoadjust Command / Function is being run - -
P1.2 ADJ_MODE Autoadjust mode FULL, STROKE, CTRL, PAR, ZERO_POS, LOCKED - -
P1.3 TEST Test Command / Function is being run - -
P1.4 EXIT Return to operating level Command / Function is being run - -
P2._ SETPOINT
P2.0 MIN_RGE Min. setpoint range 4.0 … 18.4 mA 4.0
P2.1 MAX_RGE Max. setpoint range 5.6 … 20.0 mA 20.0
P2.2 CHARACT Characteristic LINEAR, EP 1:25, 1:50, 25:1, 50:1, USERDEF, - LINEAR
P2.3 ACTION Action (output signal) DIRECT, REVERSE - DIRECT
P2.4 SHUT_CLS Shut-off value 0% OFF, 0.1 … 45.0 % OFF
P2.5 SHUT_OPN Shut-off value 100% OFF, 55.0 … 100.0 - OFF
P2.6 RAMP UP Setpoint ramp (up) OFF, 1 … 200 s OFF
P2.7 RAMP_DN Setpoint ramp (down) OFF, 1 … 200 s OFF
P3._ ACTUATOR
P3.0 MIN_RGE Operating range, min. 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0.0
P3.1 MAX_RGE Operating range, max. 0.0 ... 100.0 % 100.0
P3.2 ZERO_POS Zero position CLOCKWISE, CTCLOCKWISE - CTCLOCKW.
P4._ MESSAGES
P4.0 TIME_OUT Dead band time limit OFF, 1 … 200 OFF
P4.1 POS_SW1 Switching point SW 1 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0.0
P4.2 POS_SW2 Switching point SW 2 0.0 ... 100.0 % 100.0
P4.3 SW1_ACTV Active direction SW1 EXCEED, FALL_BEL - FALL_BEL
P4.4 SW2_ACTV Active direction SW2 EXCEED, FALL_BEL - EXCEED
P5._ ALARMS
P5.0 LEAKAGE Leakage to actuator ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P5.1 SP_RGE Setpoint time-out ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P5.2 SENS_RGE Operating range oversh. ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P5.3 CTRLER Controller inactive ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P5.4 TIME_OUT Positioning loop monitoring ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P5.5 STRK_CTR Movement counter ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P5.6 TRAVEL Travel counter ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P6._ MAN_ADJ
P6.0 MIN_VR Operating range, min. 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0.0
P6.1 MAX_VR Operating range, max. 0.0 ... 100.0 % 100.0
P6.2 ACTUATOR Actuator type LINEAR, ROTARY - LINEAR
P6.3 SPRNG_Y2 Spring action (Y2) CLOCKWISE, CTCLOCKWISE - CTCLOCKW.
P6.4 DANG_UP Dead angle open 0.0 … 45.0 % 0.0
P6.5 DANG_DN Dead angle closed 55.0 … 100.0 % 100.0
P7._ CTRL_PAR
P7.0 KP UP KP value (up) 0.1 … 120 - 5.0
P7.1 KP DN KP value (down) 0.1 … 120 - 5.0
P7.2 TVUP TV value (up) 10 … 450 ms 200
P7.3 TVDN TV value (down) 10 … 450 ms 200
P7.4 Y-OFS UP Y offset (up) Y-min … 100.0 24.0
P7.5 Y-OFS DN Y offset (down) Y-min … 100.0 % 24.0
P7.6 TOL_BAND Tolerance band 0.3 … 10.0 % 1.5
P7.7 DEADBAND Dead band 0.1 ... 10.0 % 0.1
P7.8 DB_APPR Dead-band approach Slow / medium / fast - Fast
P7.9 TEST Test Command / Function is being run - -
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 23

Configuration
Param. Display Function Possible parameter settings Unit Factory set.

P8._ ANLG_OUT
P8.0 MIN_RGE Min. current range 4.0 … 18.4 mA 4.0
P8.1 MAX_RGE Max. current range 5.6 … 20.0 mA 20.0
P8.2 ACTION Valve action DIRECT/REVERSE - DIRECT
P8.3 ALARM Alarm message HIGH_CUR, LOW_CUR - HIGH_CUR
P8.4 RB_CHAR Count back characteristic DIRECT, RECALC - DIRECT
curve
P8.5 TEST Test NONE, FAILED, ALRM, CUR, CURRENT - NONE
P9._ DIG_OUT
P9.0 ALRM_LOG Signal level dig. outputs ACTIV_HI, ACTIV_LO - ACTIV_HI
P9.1 SW1_LOG Signal level SW1 ACTIV_HI, ACTIV_LO - ACTIV_HI
P9.2 SW2_LOG Signal level SW2 ACTIV_HI, ACTIV_LO - ACTIV_HI
P9.3 TEST Test ALARM_ON, SW1_ON, SW2_ON, ALL_ON, NONE - NONE
P10._ DIG_IN
P10.0 FUNCTION Digital input NONE, POS_0%, POS_100%, POS_HOLD, CNF-LOCK, - NONE
OP_LOCK, ALL_LOCK
P11._ FS / IP
P11.0 FAIL_POS Safe position ACTIVE, INACTIVE - INACTIVE
P11.1 FACT_SET Factory setting Command / Function is being run - -
P11.2 IP_TYP I/P module type NO_F_POS, F_SAFE_1, F_SAFE_2, F_FREEZE_1, - NO_F_POS
F_FREEZE_2
24 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

3.3
Fig. 5
45/18-79-EN
Operating level
Parameter “EXIT”
°C
(NV_SAVE) I.0 % I.I I.2 I.3 ENTER
mA
CTRL_ADP
conf
CTRL_FIX MANUAL MAN_SENS
ENTER (3 ... 0)
(3 ... 0)
MODE
Parameter overview (figure)
conf Configuration level
P1._ P2._ P3._ P4._ P5._ P6._ P7._ P8._ P9._ P10._ P11._
conf STANDARD conf SETPOINT conf ACTUATOR conf MES con f ALARMS conf MAN_ADJ co nf CTRL_PAR conf ANLG_OUT conf DIG_OUT con f DIG_IN conf FS/IP
P1.0 P2.0 P3.0 P4.0 P5.0 P6.0 P7.0 P8.0 P9.0 P10.0 P11.0
P1.1 P2.1 P3.1 P4.1 P5.1 P6.1 P7.1 P8.1 P9.1 P10.1 P11.1
P4.2 P6.2 P7.2 P8.2 P11.2
TZIDC / TZIDC-200
P1.2 P2.2 P3.2 P5.2 P9.2
P1.3 P2.3 P3.3 P4.3 P5.3 P6.3 P7.3 P8.3 P9.3 P11.3
P1.4 P2.4 P4.4 P5.4 P6.4 P7.4 P8.4 P9.4 P11.4
P2.5 P4.5 P5.5 P6.5 P7.5 P8.5 P11.5
P2.6 P5.6 P6.6 P7.6 P8.6
MODE P2.7 P5.7 P7.7
P2.8 P7.8
P7.9
ENTER
MODE
M00059
25
Configuration
Configuration
3.4 Parameter group 1: Standard
conf
3.4.1 P1.0 Actuator type

With this parameter you can configure the TZIDC/TZIDC-200 positioner
for operation on a linear actuator (sensor range +/-30°) or on a rotary
actuator (sensor range +/-45°). No mechanical changes on the positioner conf
are required.
Important
After changing the actuator type, it is recommended that you run
Autoadjust to prevent linearity errors.
Selection:
LINEAR Linear actuator
ROTARY Rotary actuator
Factory setting: LINEAR
26 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.4.2 P1.1 Autoadjust
The following values are determined during Autoadjust: %
°C
mA
• Direction of the actuator conf
• Direction of reset spring

• Stroking distance of the actuator
• Stroke time for both directions
• Control parameters
• Offset for the I/P module
Important %
°C
mA
The mode and scope of the Autoadjust can be selected via parameter 1.2. co nf
To start the Autoadjust, press and hold ENTER until the countdown from 3
to 0 is finished. During countdown, the Autoadjust mode selected via
parameter P1.2 is indicated in the display. While Autoadjust is running, the
control loop symbol flashes in the display, and the current state of
Autoadjust is indicated with the messages listed below.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 27

Configuration
Important %
°C
mA
All messages except RUN must be acknowledged with ENTER.
co nf
No
acknowledgement
RUN Autoadjust is running.

CALC_ERR Error during plausibility check.
con f
COMPLETE Autoadjust completed successfully.
BREAK Autoadjust has been stopped by the operator. This can be Acknowledgement
done locally by pressing ENTER. required
OUTOFRNG Sensor range of the positioner has been exceeded;

Autoadjust was stopped.
NO_SCALE End positions have not yet been determined; therefore,
partial Autoadjust cannot be run.
RNG_ERR Less than 10% of the sensor range is used.
TIMEOUT Time-out; parameter could not be determined within 200
seconds. Autoadjust was stopped.
SPR_ERR The actual spring action does not match the configured
direction.
When Autoadjust is completed without any errors, the device displays the
message RUN in the bottom line and a code number in the top line,
indicating the step that has just been performed:
10 Air is completely evacuated from actuator (OUT1). The fully
evacuated position is saved.
20 Air is completely ventilated from actuator (OUT1). The fully
ventilated position is saved.
30 Stroke time determination is prepared.
31 Actuator travels from 0% to 100%, stroke time is measured and
saved.
32 Actuator travels from 0% to 100%, stroke time is measured and
saved.
40 - 49 Tolerance band is determined and saved (minimum value). PD
parameters for fast control < tolerance band is determined and
saved.
50 - 59 PID parameters for precise control of control deviation <
tolerance band is determined and saved.
200 Autoadjust is complete.
28 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
When a partial run of Autoadjust has been selected (see Parameter P6.4),
the following code numbers are shown:
Stops only: Steps 10 – 32 and step 200
Parameters only: Steps 40 – 120 and step 200
Zero only:
10 Air is completely evacuated from actuator (OUT1). The fully
evacuated position is saved.
200 Autoadjust is complete.
3.4.3 P1.2 Autoadjust

With this parameter you determine the mode or scope of the Autoadjust %
°C
mA
function.
co nf
FULL Complete Autoadjust

STROKE Stops only
CTRL_PAR Control parameters only
ZERO_POS Zero position only (configured stops required)
LOCKED No Autoadjust
Factory setting: FULL
3.4.4 P1.3 Test

With this test the positioner is activated, and you can check the effects of %
the changes to this parameter group, e.g. by introducing setpoint changes

or setpoint ramps using a current source. conf
Normally, INACTIVE is shown in the display. To start the test, press and
hold ENTER until the countdown from 3 to 0 is finished. The test is
activated. The display shows the control loop symbol and a flashing %
°C
mA
message. The test is automatically stopped after two minutes and can
also be stopped by pressing any button. conf
Important
It is not possible to start the test when the safe position is active (see
parameter 11.0). Instead, the message FAIL_POS is displayed.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 29

Configuration
3.4.5 P1.4 Return to operating level
With this parameter you can leave the configuration level. The positioner %
°C
returns to the operating level. Here you can either save data in the non-
volatile memory or discard all previously made changes (also the changes conf
in other parameter groups).

To leave the configuration level (with or without saving), press and hold
ENTER until the countdown from 3 to 0 is finished.
The active saving process is indicated by the message NV_SAVE. After
saving a plausibility check is executed.
If an error occurs during the check or while saving, the data cannot be
saved; an error message is displayed instead (see the chapter “Error
messages”).
Selection:
NV_SAVE Saves settings in the non-volatile memory.
CANCEL Discards all changes made since the last save to the non-
volatile memory.
30 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.5 Parameter group 2: Setpoint
conf
3.5.1 P2.0 Minimum of setpoint range

The setpoint range is the input current range as a percentage of the
operating range for the valves and fittings (from 0 ... 100 %).
conf
Important
The configured setpoint range must not be smaller than 20% (3.2 mA).
With this parameter you determine the lower limit of the setpoint range.
You can enter a value within the admissible value range of 4 ... 18.4 mA,
with one decimal.
Input value: 4.0 ... 18.4 mA
Factory setting: 4.0 mA
3.5.2 P2.1 Max. of setpoint range

The setpoint range is the input current range as a percentage of the %
°C
mA
operating range for the valves and fittings (from 0 ... 100 %).
conf
Important
The configured setpoint range must not be smaller than 20% (3.2 mA).
With parameter P2.0 you determine the upper limit of the setpoint range.
You can enter a value within the admissible value range of 5.6 ... 20 mA,
with one decimal.
Input value: 5.6 ... 20.0 mA
Setting examples
Setpoint range: Min. = 8.3 mA, Max. = 15.6 mA
Split range: Min. = 12.0 mA, Max. = 20.0 mA
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 31

Configuration
3.5.3 P2.2 Characteristic curve
This parameter enables you to select a function that adjusts the behavior %
°C
mA
of the positioner to the input signal after a predefined course. This
linearizes the action of the valves and fittings and improves the overall conf
control loop.
Besides five predefined curves you can also select a user-configurable
curve, which can be defined via a PC with the appropriate configuration
software and saved in the device.
Selection:
LINEAR linear
EP 1/25 equal percentage 1:25
USERDEF: configurable by user
USERDEF: LINEAR
3.5.4 P2.3 Action (positioning signal)

The action describes the relation between analog setpoint and pneumatic °C
%
output OUT1. mA
Increasing: Setpoint 0 ... 100% î Output 0 ... 100% conf
Decreasing: Setpoint 0 ... 100 % î Output 100 ... 0%

Selection:
DIRECT Increasing
Positioning signal 4 ... 20 mA
= Position 0 ... 100%
REVERSE Decreasing
Positioning signal 20 ... 4 mA
= Position 0 ... 100%
Factory setting: DIRECT
32 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.5.5 P 2.4 Shut-off value 0%
The shut-off value SHUT_CLS is a percentage of the operating range
(with one decimal place) from which the 0% position is driven to. Once the
specified position limit value is reached, the actuator moves into the 0%
conf
end position.
Input value: 0,1 ... 20,0
Factory setting: 1
As a result, the valve is moved in control mode into the 0% end position
through full evacuation or ventilation.
In the 0% end position, it continues to be adjusted to the position setpoint.
3.5.6 P 2.5 Shut-off value 100%

The shut-off value SHUT_OPN is a percentage of the operating range
(with one decimal place) from which the 100% position is driven to. Once
the specified position limit value is reached, the actuator moves into the
conf
100% mechanical end position.
Input value: 80,0 ... 99,9
Factory setting: OFF
In the 100% end position, it continues to be adjusted to the position
setpoint.
When entering a value, the valve is moved in control mode into the 100%
end position through full evacuation or ventilation.
Settings for Autoadjust:
Rotary actuators = 99
When the limit value is reached, the actuator is fully ventilated.
Linear actuator = 100
Controlling continues in the 100% position.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 33

Configuration
3.5.7 P2.6 Setpoint ramp (up)
Here the stroke time for the actuator can be increased. A setpoint change %
°C
mA
is not directly transferred to the positioner but rather the speed is reduced
accordingly. The set value should always be greater than the shortest conf
stroke time determined during Autoadjust.

Input value: OFF ... 1 ... 200 seconds
Important C
%
mA
• To display the stroke time (stroke time up), press and hold the ENTER
button. conf
Caution - Risk of crushing!

The setpoint ramp is deactivated in the case of any functions which involve approaching the
safe position. This even applies in the case of errors.
The drive will therefore move without delay.
• Avoid reaching into the adjustment mechanism.
3.5.8 P2.7 Setpoint ramp (down)

Here the stroke time for the actuator can be increased. A setpoint change C
%
is not directly transferred to the positioner but rather the speed is reduced mA
accordingly. The set value should always be greater than the shortest
conf
stroke time determined during Autoadjust.
Important C
%
mA
• To display the stroke time (stroke time down), press and hold the
ENTER button. c onf
Caution - Risk of crushing!

The setpoint ramp is deactivated in the case of any functions which involve approaching the
safe position. This even applies in the case of errors.
The drive will therefore move without delay.
• Avoid reaching into the adjustment mechanism.
34 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
°C
mA

messages”).
Selection:
volatile memory.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 35

Configuration
3.6 Parameter group 3: Operating range
conf
3.6.1 P3.0 Minimum of operating range

The operating range can be configured to be smaller than the maximum %
°C
mA
mechanical operating range.
conf
The setpoint range always refers to the configured operating range. With
this parameter you determine the lower limit of the operating range.
Caution - Warning!
This function is only effective in control mode.
If auxiliary power fails (electric or pneumatic) and in manual mode, the
mechanical stops are reached.
Important
The operating range must be greater than 10 % of the sensor range.
Input value: 0,0 ... 100,0 %

Factory setting: 0,0 %
Important
The display of the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner in operating modes 1.0
through 1.2 always refers to the configured operating range and indicates
the position in %.
36 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.6.2 P3.1 Maximum operating range
The operating range can be configured to be smaller than the maximum
mechanical operating range.
conf
The setpoint range always refers to the configured operating range. With
this parameter you determine the upper limit of the operating range.
Caution - Warning!
This function is only effective in control mode.
If auxiliary power fails (electric or pneumatic) and in manual mode, the
mechanical stops are reached.
Important
The operating range must be greater than 10% of the sensor range.
Input value: 0,0 ... 100,0 %

Important
The display of the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner in operating modes
1.0 through 1.2 always refers to the configured operating range and
indicates the position in %.
3.6.3 P3.2 Zero position

With this parameter you can assign the zero position of the display to the %
°C
mA
zero position of the valves and fittings. It also allows you to select the
direction of rotation of the sensor shaft (looking at the open housing). conf
Important
Normally, the zero position is determined automatically and saved during
standard Autoadjust.
Linear actuators î “counterclockwise”
Rotary actuators î “clockwise”
Selection:
CLOCKW Stop reached turning clockwise
CTCLOCKW Stop reached turning counterclockwise
Factory setting: CTCLOCKW
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 37

Configuration
°C
mA

messages”).
Selection:
CANCEL Discards all changes made since the last permanent save
operation.
38 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.7 Parameter group 4: Messages
conf
3.7.1 P4.0 Dead band time limit

With this parameter you enter the monitoring time until reaching the
setpoint.
When the tolerance band is exceeded, the monitoring time is started. If
the tolerance band within the predefined time is again not reached by the
new position setpoint, an alarm is triggered.
(Parameter 5.4 must be activated.)
Caution - Warning!
With active shutdown function there is no alarm message.
After reaching the setpoint the alarm is automatically reset. C

%
mA
c onf
Important
The stroke time to be monitored should be 1.5 to 2 x greater than the
shortest stroke time selected during Autoadjust.
Press and hold the ENTER button to display the stroke time. By pressing
ENTER briefly again you can toggle between UP stroke time and DOWN
stroke time.
3.7.2 P4.1 Switching point SW1

With this parameter you can define the switching point SW1 as a °C
%
percentage of the operating range. mA
If the position exceeds or falls below SW1, the corresponding signal conf
output on the plug-in module is activated (see also parameter group P9._).
Important
Changing the operating range also changes the positions of the switching
points with respect to the position of the valves and fittings.
Input value: 0.0 ... 100.0 %

Factory setting: 0.0 %
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 39

Configuration
3.7.3 P4.2 Switching point SW2
With this parameter you can define the switching point SW2 as a %
°C
mA
percentage of the operating range.
conf
If the position exceeds or falls below SW2, the corresponding signal
output on the plug-in module is activated (see also parameter group P9._).
Important
Changing the operating range also changes the positions of the switching
points with respect to the position of the valves and fittings.
Input value: 0.0 ... 100.0 %

3.7.4 P4.3 Active direction SW1

With this parameter you define whether a message is to be triggered for %
°C
mA
exceeding or falling below switching point SW1.
conf
EXCEED Message when exceeding switching point SW1.
FALL_BEL Message when falling below switching point SW1.
Factory setting: FALL_BEL
3.7.5 P4.4 Active direction SW2

With this parameter you define whether a message is to be triggered for %
°C
mA
exceeding or falling below switching point SW2.
conf
EXCEED Message when exceeding switching point SW2.
FALL_BEL Message when falling below switching point SW2.
Factory setting: EXCEED
40 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
°C
mA
volatile memory or discard all previously made changes (also the changes co nf

messages”).
Selection:
operation.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 41

Configuration
3.8 Parameter group 5: Alarms
°C
%
mA
conf
Important
Active alarms are signalled at the digital output and through the “Analog
feedback” option.
3.8.1 P5.0 Leakage to actuator

With this parameter you activate leakage detection for the actuator. It is %
°C
mA
only active in control mode CTL_ADP.
conf
If the monitoring function detects leakage at the actuator, a message is
issued via alarm output on the mainboard.
ACTIVE Monitoring active.

INACTIVE Monitoring inactive.
Factory setting: INACTIVE
3.8.2 P5.1 Setpoint time-out

With this parameter you can determine that a corresponding alarm is °C
%
signalled via the digital output when falling below or exceeding the mA
setpoint range (<3.8 mA or above 20.5 mA).

conf
ACTIVE Setpoint monitoring active.

INACTIVE Setpoint monitoring inactive.
3.8.3 P5.2 Operating range exceeded

With this parameter you can determine that an alarm is signalled via the %
°C
mA
digital output when the configured operating range is exceeded by 4 %.
(Position < -4 % or > +104 %). conf
This may indicate improperly adjusted mounting or mechanical wear in a

limit stop.
ACTIVE Alarm is activated.

INACTIVE Alarm is not activated.
42 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.8.4 P5.3 Controller inactive
With this parameter you can determine that an alarm is signalled via %
°C
mA
digital output when the positioner is not active, i.e. control is interrupted by
another operating mode or by configuration. conf
Important
For details on the states that can result in a message, refer to the chapter
"Alarm messages".
ACTIVE Alarm is activated.

3.8.5 P5.4 Positioning time-out

With this parameter you activate the “Positioning time-out” function. °C
%
mA
conf
The alarm is issued via digital output when the setpoint within the
specified monitoring time is not reached in control mode. (The monitoring
time is entered with the parameter group P4.0 Dead band time limit).
The function is only active in control mode P1.0 and P1.1.
ACTIVE Positioning time-out is activated.

45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 43

Configuration
3.8.6 P5.5 Movement counter
With this parameter you can determine that an alarm is signalled when the %
°C
mA
movement counter exceeds the specified limit value. The limit value is
edited remotely via PC. conf
ACTIVE Alarm for exceeding travel counter limit value.

INACTIVE No alarm
3.8.7 P5.6 Travel counter

With this parameter you can determine that an alarm is signalled when the %
°C
mA
travel counter exceeds the specified limit value. The limit value is edited
remotely via PC. conf
ACTIVE Alarm for exceeding movement counter limit value.

INACTIVE No alarm

°C
mA

messages”).
Selection:
operation.
44 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.9 Parameter group 6: Manual adjustment
conf
3.9.1 P6.0 Minimum of operating range

Normally, the operating range is determined automatically during %
°C
mA
Autoadjust. A partial run of Autoadjust that is limited to the control
parameters (CTRL_PAR, see parameter P6.4) or valves and fittings conf
without end stops, however, requires manual adjustment of the operating

range.
Caution - Risk
After manual adjustment of the end position, it is mandatory under P3.0
and P3.1 to limit the operating range to > 0.1 and < 99.9. Otherwise, the
valves and fittings may be driven at full speed to an end position.
Danger of injuries!
The range between high and low limit value must be at least 10% of the
full range. Otherwise, the message VR<10% is displayed.
Important
Use as large are range as possible. This parameter is not active when the
safe position is active. The display then shows the message FAIL_POS.
With P6.0 you determine the lower limit of the operating range.
or Press in order to travel to the desired position.
ENTER Press and hold until the countdown is finished (MIN_SET). The
position is taken over as min. limit value.
ENTER Press briefly. The set limit value is displayed for 2 seconds
(MIN_SAVE).
Setting: 0.0 ... 100.0 % (sensor range) monitoring is not

active.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45

Configuration
3.9.2 P6.1 Maximum operating range
Normally, the operating range is determined automatically during %
°C
mA
Autoadjust. However, a partial run of Autoadjust that is limited to the
control parameters (STANDARD, see parameter P1.2) or fittings without co nf
end stops requires manual adjustment of the operating range.
Caution - Risk
After manual adjustment of the end position, it is mandatory under P3.0
and P3.1 to limit the operating range to > 0.1 and < 99.9. Otherwise, the
valves and fittings may be driven at full speed to an end position.
Danger of injuries!
The range between high and low limit value must be at least 10% of the
full range. Otherwise, the message VR<10% is displayed.
Important
Use as large are range as possible. This parameter is not active when the
safe position is active. The display then shows the message FAIL_POS.
With P6.1 you determine the upper limit of the operating range.
or Press in order to travel to the desired position.
ENTER Press and hold until the countdown is finished (MIN_SET). The
position is taken over as min. limit value.
ENTER Press briefly. The set limit value is displayed for 2 seconds
(MIN_SAVE).
Setting: 0.0 ... 100.0 % (sensor range) monitoring is not

active.
46 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.9.3 P6.2 Actuator type
With this parameter you can configure the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner
for operation on a linear actuator (sensor range +/-30°) or on a rotary
actuator (sensor range +/-45°). No mechanical modifications to the
co nf
positioner are required.
Important
After changing the actuator type, it is recommended that you run
Autoadjust to prevent linearity errors.
Selection:
LINEAR Linear actuator
ROTARY Rotary actuator
3.9.4 P6.3 Spring action (Y2)

Caution - Risk %
°C
mA
Incorrect entries may result in the actuator traveling

conf
to a mechanical stop at full speed.
Danger of injuries!
With this parameter you specify the end stop to which the reset spring of
the pneumatic actuator drives the valves and fittings in case auxiliary
power fails.
The corresponding end stop is determined during Autoadjust. If, however,
only the control parameters are determined (STANDARD, see parameter
P1.2), the spring action must be entered manually.
Select the direction of rotation of the sensor shaft (looking at the open
housing), if the device is in safe position as a result of the spring force
(actuator exhausts via OUT1). For double-acting actuators, the spring
action corresponds to filling with air through pneumatic output OUT2.
CLOCKW Stop reached turning clockwise

CTCLOCKW Stop reached turning counterclockwise
Factory setting: CTCLOCKW
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 47

Configuration
3.9.5 P6.5 Dead Angle Open
With this parameter you can cut off the unusable range for valve flow %
°C
mA
action during positioning. Dead Angle Open is a percentage value of the
valve's operating range, if the input signal is 19.84 mA. con f
Input value: 55,0 ... 100,0 %

3.9.6 P6.4 Dead Angle Close

With this parameter you can cut off the unusable range for valve flow %
°C
mA
action during positioning. Dead Angle Close is a percentage value of the
valve's operating range, if the input signal is 4.16 mA. con f
Input value: 0,0 ... 45,0 %


°C
mA
volatile memory or discard all previously made changes (also the changes con f

messages”).
Selection:
volatile memory.
48 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.10 Parameter group 7: Control parameters
conf
3.10.1 P7.0 KP value (up)

Important °C
%
mA
All control parameters are determined in an optimum way for most
actuators during Autoadjust. Changes should only be made when conf
Autoadjust cannot be executed or control stability cannot be achieved.
The KP value is the gain of the controller. The controlling speed and
stability are influenced by the KP value. With higher KP values, the
controlling speed increases.
Important
The control precision is not affected by the KP value.
To compensate for existing dissymmetries in the controlled system, the

KP value should be set separately for both directions (up/down).
For most actuators, satisfactory control action is achieved with a KP value
between 2.0 and 10.0.
With parameter P7.0 you can adjust the KP value for the positioning
direction up (towards 100%).
Input value: 0.1 … 120.0
Factory setting: 5,0
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 49

Configuration
3.10.2 P7.1 KP value (down)
Important %
°C
mA

co nf
actuators during Autoadjust. Changes should only be made when
The KP value is the gain of the controller. The controlling speed and
stability are influenced by the KP value. With higher KP values, the
controlling speed increases.
Important
The control precision is not affected by the KP value.

KP value should be set separately for both directions (up/down).
For most actuators, satisfactory control action is achieved with a KP value
between 2.0 and 10.0.
With parameter P7.1 you can adjust the KP value for the positioning
direction down (towards 0%).
Input value: 0.1 … 120.0
Factory setting: 5,0
50 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.10.3 P7.2 TV value (up)
Important °C
%
mA
actuators during Autoadjust. Changes should only be made when conf
The TV value is the derivative time of the controller.

Speed and stability are affected by the TV value in such a way that it
counteracts dynamically to the KP value. The speed of the control action
decreases for an increasing TV value.
TV value should be set separately for both directions (up/down).
With parameter P7.2 you can adjust the TV value for the positioning
Input value: 10 … 450 ms
Factory setting: 200 ms
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 51

Configuration
3.10.4 P7.3 TV value (down)
Important %
°C
mA
All control parameters are determined in an optimum way for most co nf

The TV value is the derivative time of the controller.

Speed and stability are affected by the TV value in such a way that it
counteracts dynamically to the KP value. The speed of the control action
decreases for an increasing TV value.
TV value should be set separately for both directions (up/down).
With parameter P7.3 you can adjust the TV value for the positioning
Input value: 10 … 450 ms
Factory setting: 200 ms
52 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.10.5 P7.4 Y offset (up)
Important %
°C
mA

The "offset for the output signal" linearizes the behavior of the I/P module
used and enables fast control for even small control deviations. The value
is limited a the low end by a minimum value (neutral zone)
The offset substantially affects the controlling speed for control deviations
smaller than 5 %.
In manual mode P1.2 and P1.3 the offset values are issued for fine
adjustment to the I/P module. For larger, slower actuators Autoadjust may
determine values higher than 80%. In these cases there will be no
noticeable difference between fine and coarse adjustment while in manual
mode.
offset should be set separately for both directions (up/down).
For most actuators, satisfactory control is achieved with offset values
between 40 and 80%. If the control stability for setpoint changes is less
than 2% overshoot, both offset values should be decreased.
Both offset values should be increased when the actuator stops outside
the tolerance band.
With parameter P7.4 you can adjust the Y offset for the positioning
Input value: Y-min ... 100.0%
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 53

Configuration
3.10.6 P7.5 Y offset (down)
Important %
°C
mA

The "offset for the output signal" linearizes the behavior of the I/P module
used and enables fast control for even small control deviations. The value
is limited a the low end by a minimum value (neutral zone)
The offset substantially affects the controlling speed for control deviations
smaller than 5 %.
In manual mode P1.2 and P1.3 the offset values are issued for fine
adjustment to the I/P module. For larger, slower actuators Autoadjust may
determine values higher than 80%. In these cases there will be no
noticeable difference between fine and coarse adjustment while in manual
mode.
offset should be set separately for both directions (up/down).
For most actuators, satisfactory control is achieved with offset values
between 40 and 80%. If the control stability for setpoint changes is less
than 2% overshoot, both offset values should be decreased.
Both offset values should be increased when the actuator stops outside
the tolerance band.
With parameter P7.5 you can adjust the Y offset for the positioning
Input value: Y-min ... 100.0%
54 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.10.7 P7.6 Tolerance band
The tolerance band P7.6 TOL_BAND defines a +/- range around the %
°C
mA
setpoint. When the position of the valves and fittings reaches this range,
the parameter set of the controller is toggled to a fixed PID-algorithm that co nf
is used to continue with slow controlling action until reaching a dead band
P7.7 DEADBAND.
Only when reaching the sensitivity range the system is considered as
balanced. (see also parameter P1.2).
Input value: 0,3 ... 10,0 %
in steps of 0.1%
3.10.8 P7.7 Dead band

The “dead band” P7.7 Deadband defines a +/- range around the setpoint. %
°C
mA
Once the valves and fittings reach this range, the positioner maintains this
position. co nf
Important
The dead band must always be 0.2% less than the tolerance band.
Input value: 0,10 ... 10,00 % in steps of 0.01%
3.10.9 P7.8 Dead-band approach

The parameter DB_APPR specifies the speed at which the dead band is %
°C
mA
approached.
co nf
In rare cases, overshooting can occur when the valve position is
controlled. This can be prevented by reducing the speed of the dead-band
approach.
Input value: Slow
Medium
Fast
Factory setting: Fast
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 55

Configuration
3.10.10 P7.9 Test
With this test the controller is activated, and you can check the effects of °C
%
the changes to this parameter group, e.g. by introducing setpoint changes mA
or setpoint ramps using a current source.

co nf
Normally, INACTIVE is shown in the display. To start the test, press and
hold ENTER until the countdown from 3 to 0 is finished. The test is
activated. The display shows the control loop symbol and a flashing
message.
The test is automatically stopped after two minutes and can also be
stopped by pressing any button.
Important
It is not possible to activate the test when the safe position is active (see
parameter 11.0). Instead, the message FAIL_POS is displayed.

With this parameter you can leave the configuration level. The positioner C
mA

messages”).
Selection:
volatile memory.
56 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.11 Parameter group 8: Analog output 1
conf
3.11.1 P8.0 Minimum of current range

With this parameter you determine the low current range limit for the
analog position feedback. The current range corresponds to the
configured stroke range.
co nf
Important
The current range limits can be freely configured between 4 mA
and 18.5 mA. However, the current range must not be smaller than 10%
(1.6 mA) of the range.
Input value: 5.6 … 20.0 mA

3.11.2 P8.1 Maximum of current range

With this parameter you determine the upper current range limit for the °C
%
analog position feedback. mA
conf
Important
The current range limits can be freely configured between 4 mA
and 20 mA. However, the current range must not be smaller than 10%
(1.6 mA) of the range.
Input value: 4.0 … 20.0 mA

3.11.3 P8.2 Valve action

With this parameter you determine the valve action for the analog position %
°C
mA
feedback.
co nf
Increasing = position 0 ... 100 % = signal 4 ... 20 mA
Decreasing = position 0 ... 100% = signal 20 ... 4 mA
Factory setting: DIRECT
1
on the plug-in module for analog feedback
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 57

Configuration
3.11.4 P8.3 Alarm message 2
When an alarm/message is generated in the TZIDC / TZIDC-200
positioner, it is signaled via the digital and analog output. With the
parameter P8.3 you can select a higher or lower alarm current for analog
co nf
feedback.
Important
Without electrical energy or for initialization, the output signal > 20.5 mA. In
special versions (hardware modification) < 3.8 mA is also possible.
HIGH_CUR Alarm current I > 20.5 mA

LOW_CUR Alarm current I < 3.8 mA
Factory setting: HIGH_CUR
3.11.5 P8.4 Count back characteristic curve

With this parameter you can determine whether the position indicator and °C
%
the analog position feedback follow the characteristic curve set in mA
parameter P2.2 Characteristic curve.

co nf
3.11.6 P8.5 Test

Test is for simulation of the analog output. The test allows you to simulate °C
%
effects during commissioning without affecting the normal process. mA
co nf
Important
The test is automatically stopped after two minutes.
While the test is running, the corresponding message (see below) flashes
in the display.
NONE no function.
FAILED Simulation of position feedback failure (CPU).
I > 20.5 mA (default setting) or
I < 3.8 mA (special version, modified hardware)
ALRM_CUR Simulation of an alarm current
< 3.8 mA or I > 20.5 mA
CURRENT Output of the current setpoint as current value via analog
output. All configurations and settings of the analog input or
output must be taken into consideration.
2
on the plug-in module for analog feedback
58 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
°C
mA

messages”).
Selection:
volatile memory.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 59

Configuration
3.12 Parameter group 9: Digital output
°C
%
mA
conf
3.12.1 P9.0 Signal level digital outputs 3

With this parameter you can determine the logic level of the alarm output. %
°C
mA
Selection:
co nf
ACTIV_HI active = output current I > 2 mA

ACTIV_LO active = output current I < 1 mA
3.12.2 P9.1 Signal level SW1

With this parameter you can determine the active level for switching °C
%
output SW1*. mA
Selection: co nf

3.12.3 P9.2 Signal level SW2

With this parameter you can determine the active level for switching %
°C
mA
output SW2*.
conf
Selection:
3
SW1 and SW2 are on the plug-in module for digital feedback
60 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
3.12.4 P9.3 Test
Test is for simulation for the digital output. %
°C
mA
co nf
Important
The test is automatically stopped after two minutes and can be aborted by
pressing any button.
While the test is running, the corresponding message (see below) flashes
in the display.
NONE No function
ALRM_ON Alarm is simulated (DO active)
SW1_ON Reaching switching point 1 is simulated
(SW1 active)
SW2_ON Reaching switching point 2 is simulated
(SW2 active)
ALL_ON Alarm and switching points are simulated (all DOs active)

°C
mA

messages”).
Selection:
operation.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 61

Configuration
3.13 Parameter group 10: Digital input
°C
%
mA
conf
3.13.1 P10.0 Digital input

For the digital input, one of the following protective functions can be %
°C
mA
selected via local operation.
co nf
• No function (default)
• Move to 0 % position
• Move to 100 % position
• Hold previous position
• Lock the configuration on-site
• Lock the configuration and operation on-site
• Lock all access (on-site or via PC)
The selected function is activated when the 24 V signal is no longer
connected to the digital output (< 10 V DC).
The safety functions POS_0%, POS_100% and POS_HOLD run in the
operating level in both types of control modes P1.0 or P1.1. BIN_CTRL is
shown in the display.
If a corresponding function is active, a corresponding value is defined
internally for the positioner. The actuator is then driven into the end
position or position specified under consideration of the setpoint ramp,
configured operating range, selected behavior.
After selecting a lock CNF_LOCK, OP_LOCK or ALL_LOCK, the key
icon is displayed, indicating that the lock will be activated at the next save.
After saving and without 24 V at the digital input, the key is permanently
displayed.
Important
The lock CNF_LOCK, OP_LOCK or ALL_LOCK is displayed only if the
voltage is connected to the digital input.
62 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
CNF_LOCK Restricts local access to the configuration level. However,

local operation on the operating level is possible. The
TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner can be configured externally
(via LKS / modem and PC).
When the operator tries to activate the configuration level,
the text CNF_LOCK is displayed for approx. 5 seconds.
OP_LOCK Fully restricts local operation and configuration. With every
attempt to perform local operating actions, the text
OP_LOCK is displayed for approx. 5 seconds.
The TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner can be configured
externally (via LKS/modem and PC).
ALL_LOCK Restricts local operation (operating level and configuration
level) and external configuration via LKS / modem and PC.
With every attempt to perform local operating actions, the
text ALL_LOCK is shown for approx. 5 seconds.

With this parameter you can leave the configuration level. The positioner °C
%
returns to the operating level. Here you can either save data in the non- mA
volatile memory or discard all previously made changes (also the changes
co nf
messages”).
Selection:
operation.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 63

Configuration
3.14 Parameter group 11: Safe position
°C
%
mA
con f
3.14.1 P11.0 Safe position

This parameter must be used to activate the safe position prior to loading °C
%
the factory settings (parameter P11.1) or changing the I/P module type mA
(parameter P11.2). Note that this step is mandatory.

co nf
Important
After setting parameters P11.1 and P11.2 as required, the safe position
must be deactivated again manually.
The safe position that is activated, i.e. fail safe or fail freeze, depends on
the I/P module installed.
Activating/deactivating the safe position:

Press and hold ENTER until the displayed countdown from 3 to 0 is
finished. Then release ENTER.
The safe position is activated or deactivated, respectively.
3.14.2 P11.1 Factory settings

With this parameter you can reset the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner to °C
%
the factory setting. This is necessary, e.g., if an already configured mA
positioner has to be installed on a different actuator and subsequently

conf
reconfigured.
Caution - Risk
Make sure that the I/P module type parameter corresponds to the actual
I/P module type of the device after loading the factory settings. Otherwise
dangerous situations may occur when operating in control mode. It may
happen that the actuator is driven at full speed to the end position.
Danger of injuries!
64 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Configuration
Important
You can only load the factory settings when the actuator is in safe position
(parameter 11.0). Otherwise, the action is inhibited and the message
NO_F_POS is indicated in the display.
If you save the settings in the non-volatile memory after loading the factory
setting, operating mode 1.3 is automatically activated on the operating
level.
To load factory settings:

Press and hold ENTER until the displayed countdown from 3 to 0 is
finished.
The TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is reset to the factory settings. The
message COMPLETE is displayed.
Press ENTER to acknowledge the message.
Selection:
FS_LOAD Loads the factory settings
3.14.3 P11.2 I/P module type

With this parameter the software can be adapted to the installed I/P
module. This parameter must be set when installing another I/P module
type.
conf
Caution - Risk
Make sure that the I/P module type parameter corresponds to the actual
I/P module type of the device after loading the factory settings. Otherwise
dangerous situations may occur when operating in control mode. It may
happen that the actuator is driven at full speed to the end position.
Danger of injuries!
Caution - Risk
For safety reasons this parameter must be checked for correct setting
after restoring the factory settings.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 65

Configuration
With this parameter you can leave the configuration level. The positioner °C
%
returns to the operating level. Here you can either save data in the non- mA
volatile memory or discard all previously made changes (also the changes
conf
messages”).
Selection:
volatile memory.
66 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Error messages
4 Error messages
4.1 Error codes
Error description Error code
Meaning:
The supply voltage was interrupted or low for more than 20 ms.
This error is displayed after resetting the device to indicate the reason for
the reset.
Measure(s):
Check the power source and the wiring.
Meaning:
The supply voltage has fallen below the minimum voltage.
Impact:
The actuator is moved to the safe position. After appr. 5 seconds the
TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is automatically reset and starts up again
with the message ERROR. If a local communication interface (LKS) is
connected, the device will go to operating mode “LKS Supply“.
Measure(s):
Check the power source and the wiring.
Meaning:
The position is outside the sensor range. Possible reason is a malfunction
in the position sensor.
Impact:
In control mode:
The actuator is moved to the safe position.
On the configuration level:
The output is set to neutral until a button is pressed. After appr. 5 seconds
the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is automatically reset in control mode
and in the configuration level.
Measure(s):
Check the mounting.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 67

Error messages

Meaning:
No access possible to the data in the EEPROM.
Impact:
TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is automatically reset. Attempts are made
to restore the data. This compensates for intermittent errors in the
communication environment with the EEPROM.
Measure(s):
If there is still no access to the EEPROM data after resetting the device,
load the factory settings. If the error still persists, the device must be
returned for repair to the manufacturer.
Meaning:
Error while processing the measured values, pointing to an error in the
working data (RAM).
Impact:
TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is automatically reset and the RAM is
initialized.
Measure(s):
If the error still persists after resetting the TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner,
return the device for repair to the manufacturer.
Meaning:
Error during the table processing, pointing to an error in the working data
(RAM).
Impact:
initialized.
Measure(s):
68 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Error messages

Meaning:
Error when verifying the checksum of the configuration data (RAM).
Impact:
initialized.
Measure(s):
Meaning:
Error in the processor function registers (RAM).
Impact:
initialized.
Measure(s):
Meaning:
Internal error.
Impact:
TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner is automatically reset.
Measure(s):
If the error can be reproduced and occurs in the same position after
resetting, the device must be returned for repair to the manufacturer.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 69

Error messages
4.2 Alarm codes
Alarm description Alarm code
Meaning:
Leakage between TZIDC / TZIDC-200 positioner and actuator.
Impact:
Depending on how well the leakage can be compensated, small control
actions are required at regular intervals.
Measure(s):
Check the piping.
Meaning:
The setpoint current is outside the admissible range, i.e. it is < 3.8 mA or >
20.5 mA.
Impact:
None.
Measure(s):
Check the power source.
Meaning:
Alarm of the zero monitor. The zero position has shifted by more than
4 %.
Impact:
None.
In control mode a position outside the valve range can only be reached by
driving to the limit stops, as the setpoint is limited to 0 ... 100 %.
Measure(s):
Correct the mounting.
Meaning:
Controlling is inactive, because the device does not operate in control
mode or the digital input is active.
Impact:
The controller does not follow the setpoint.
Measure(s):
Switch to control mode or switch off the digital input.
70 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Error messages
Alarm description Alarm code

Meaning:
Positioning timed out. The settling time needed exceeds the configured
stroke time.
Impact:
None, or adaptive control is performed (in adaptive mode).
Measure(s):
Ensure that
• the actuator is not blocked
• the supply air pressure is adequate
• the given time limit is higher than 1.5 times the longest stroke time of
the actuator.
If adaption cannot run uninterruptedly for an actuator, adaption should be
switched on until the alarm does not occur anymore during controlling
actions.
Meaning:
The defined limit value for the stroke counter has been exceeded.
Impact:
None.
Measure(s):
Reset the counter (only possible via a connected PC with
SMART VISION).
Meaning:
The specified limit value for the travel counter has been exceeded.
Impact:
None.
Measure(s):
Reset the counter (only possible via a connected PC with
SMART VISION).
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 71

Error messages
4.3 Message codes
Message description Message code
Action stopped by operator.
Error during plausibility check.
Action completed, acknowledgement required.
Memory error, data could not be saved.
Safe position is active, action cannot be executed.
Safe position required, but not active.
Valve range limits have not yet been determined; therefore, partial
Autoadjust cannot be run.
Data is saved in the non-volatile memory.
Sensor range is exceeded, Autoadjust was automatically stopped.
Data (factory settings) are being loaded.
Less than 10 % of the sensor range is used.
Action running.
Simulation has been started externally from a PC via HART‚ Protocol;

switching outputs, alarm output and analog position feedback are no
longer influenced by the process.
Actual spring action is different from the adjusted one.
Time-out; parameter could not be determined within two minutes;

Autoadjust was automatically stopped.
72 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Error messages
4.4 Error handling TZIDC / TZIDC-200
4.4.1 Oscillation problem
The TZIDC/TZIDC-200 positioner oscillates in
control modes 1.0 and 1.1.
Press the ↑ button. Is the current value stable? No Check power source or PLS.
Yes
Switch the TZIDC/TZIDC-200 positioner to Check the piping and actuator for
operating mode 1.2 (manual) and set it to a leakage. If leakage is detected,
No
position of approx. 50 % using the local push send the positioner for repair.
buttons. Is the position stable?
Yes
Start Autostroke and save the values. Switch Yes Good job! The work activities are
the positioner to operating mode 1.1. completed.
Is the position stable?
No
Switch the TZIDC/TZIDC-200 positioner to Yes Good job! The work activities are
operating mode 1.0 (adaptive) for 4 to 5 hours completed.
in order to optimize the control stability.
Several changes to the setpoint signal are
required.
Is the positioner function stable?
No
Increase the dead band (P7.7). Yes Good job! The work activities are
completed.
Is the valve function stable?
No
The friction of the valve is too great or Slipstic

effect. Check the valve.
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 73

Error messages
4.4.2 No function
Connect 4 20 mA. No Exchange the + and - leads. Now is Yes Good job! The work
the display active? activities are completed.
Is the display active?
Yes No
Check the power source or return

defective positioners for repair.
Connect compressed Good job! The work
Yes
air. Now is it working? activities are completed.
No
Switch the positioner Start Autoadjust. Save parameters Good job! The work
to operating mode 1.2 and switch the positioner to activities are completed.
Yes Yes
(manual). Press the operating mode 1.1. In case of error
arrow button briefly. messages, check the mechanical
Press the second configuration.
arrow. Now is it
Now is it working?
working?
No No
Check the safe

position for the
pneumatic output Press the ↑ button to read the No Check power source or
module (label on the current value. Is the current value PLS.
plastic cap) and correct?
compare with
parameter P11.2.
Before changing the
parameter, the safe
position must first be Yes Good job! Work Yes
activated (P11.0). activities are
Save parameters. over after
starting
Now is it working?
Autoadjust!
No
Return the defective Switch the function for

positioner for repair. the digital input (P10.0)
to none.
74 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Appendix
5 Appendix
5.1 Additional documents
• Operating instructions for electro-pneumatic positioner TZIDC (41/18-79)
• Data sheet for intelligent positioner TZIDC (10/18-0.22)
• Operating instructions for electro-pneumatic positioner TZIDC-200 (41/10-80)
• Data sheet for intelligent positioner TZIDC-200 (10/18-0.32)
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 75

Appendix
A Operation on the operating level..............................17
Additional documents ..............................................75 Oscillation problem ..................................................73
Alarm codes .............................................................70 P
Appendix ..................................................................75 P 2.4 Shut-off value 0% ...........................................33
C P 2.5 Shut-off value 100% .......................................33
Configuration............................................................22 P1.0 Actuator type ...................................................26
D P1.1 Autoadjust........................................................27
Displays and operating elements.............................12 P1.2 Autoadjust........................................................29
E P1.3 Test..................................................................29
Error codes ..............................................................67 P1.4 Return to operating level .................................30
Error handling TZIDC / TZIDC-200..........................73 P10.0 Digital input....................................................62
Error messages........................................................67 P10.1 Return to operating level ...............................63
Explosion protection ..................................................9 P11.0 Safe position..................................................64
F P11.1 Factory settings .............................................64
Functions on the configuration level ........................15 P11.2 I/P module type..............................................65
Functions on the operating level..............................14 P11.5 Return to operating level ...............................66
G P2.0 Minimum of setpoint range ..............................31
General ....................................................................11 P2.1 Max. of setpoint range.....................................31
General information .................................................22 P2.2 Characteristic curve.........................................32
General information and notes for the reader............6 P2.3 Action (positioning signal) ...............................32
I P2.6 Setpoint ramp (up)...........................................34
Inhibiting operation ..................................................21 P2.7 Setpoint ramp (down) ......................................34
Intended use ..............................................................6 P2.8 Return to operating level .................................35
L P3.0 Minimum of operating range............................36
Local operation ........................................................11 P3.1 Maximum operating range...............................37
M P3.2 Zero position....................................................37
Message codes........................................................72 P3.3 Return to operating level .................................38
N P4.0 Dead band time limit........................................39
No function...............................................................74 P4.1 Switching point SW1 .......................................39
Note symbols .............................................................7 P4.2 Switching point SW2 .......................................40
O P4.3 Active direction SW1 .......................................40
Operating mode 1.0 P4.4 Active direction SW2 .......................................40
Adaptive control ...................................................18 P4.5 Return to operating level .................................41
Operating mode 1.1 P5.0 Leakage to actuator.........................................42
Fixed control.........................................................18 P5.1 Setpoint time-out .............................................42
Operating mode 1.2 P5.2 Operating range exceeded..............................42
Manual adjustment within the stroke range .........19 P5.3 Controller inactive............................................43
Operating mode 1.3 P5.4 Positioning time-out.........................................43
Manual adjustment within the sensor range ........20 P5.5 Movement counter...........................................44
Operating modes .....................................................18 P5.6 Travel counter..................................................44
76 TZIDC / TZIDC-200 45/18-79-EN

Appendix
P5.7 Return to operating level .................................44 Parameter group 1
P6.0 Minimum of operating range............................45 Standard...............................................................26
P6.1 Maximum operating range...............................46 Parameter group 10
P6.2 Actuator type ...................................................47 Digital input...........................................................62
P6.3 Spring action (Y2)............................................47 Parameter group 11
P6.4 Dead Angle Close ...........................................48 Safe position.........................................................64
P6.5 Dead Angle Open............................................48 Parameter group 2
P6.6 Return to operating level .................................48 Setpoint ................................................................31
P7.0 KP value (up)...................................................49 Parameter group 3
P7.1 KP value (down) ..............................................50 Operating range ...................................................36
P7.10 Return to operating level ...............................56 Parameter group 4
P7.2 TV value (up) ...................................................51 Messages .............................................................39
P7.3 TV value (down) ..............................................52 Parameter group 5
P7.4 Y offset (up) .....................................................53 Alarms ..................................................................42
P7.5 Y offset (down) ................................................54 Parameter group 6
P7.6 Tolerance band ...............................................55 Manual adjustment ...............................................45
P7.7 Dead band .......................................................55 Parameter group 7
P7.8 Dead-band approach.......................................55 Control parameters...............................................49
P7.9 Test..................................................................56 Parameter group 8
P8.0 Minimum of current range ...............................57 Analog output .......................................................57
P8.1 Maximum of current range ..............................57 Parameter group 9
P8.2 Valve action .....................................................57 Digital output ........................................................60
P8.3 Alarm message ...............................................58 Parameter overview (figure) ....................................25
P8.4 Count back characteristic curve ......................58 Parameter overview (table)......................................23
P8.5 Test..................................................................58 Plates and symbols....................................................7
P8.6 Return to operating level .................................59 R
P9.0 Signal level digital outputs...............................60 Repairs, alterations, and enhancements ...................6
P9.1 Signal level SW1 .............................................60 S
P9.2 Signal level SW2 .............................................60 Safety.........................................................................6
P9.3 Test..................................................................61 T
P9.4 Return to operating level .................................61 Target groups and qualifications................................8
45/18-79-EN TZIDC / TZIDC-200 77

ABB has Sales & Customer Support expertise in over The Company’s policy is one of continuous product
100 countries worldwide. improvement and the right is reserved to modify the
information contained herein without notice.
Printed in the Fed. Rep. of Germany (03.2009)
© ABB 2009
45/18-79-EN Rev. B
3KXE341001R4501
ABB Limited ABB Inc. ABB Automation Products GmbH

Salterbeck Trading Estate 125 E. County Line Road Schillerstr. 72
Workington, Cumbria Warminster, PA 18974 32425 Minden
CA14 5DS USA Germany
UK Tel: +1 215 674 6000 Tel: +49 551 905-534
Tel: +44 (0)1946 830 611 Fax: +1 215 674 7183 Fax: +49 551 905-555
Fax: +44 (0)1946 832 661 CCC-support.deapr@de.abb.com
DTM for TZID-C/TZID-C200 HART communication for
positioner TZID-C/TZID-C200
Manual 42/63-24 EN Rev. 01

DTM TZID-C/TZID-C200
HART communication for positioner TZID-C/TZID-C200
Manual
Document number: 42/63-24 EN
Issue date: 01.02
Revision: 01
Vendor:
Schillerstrasse 72
D-32425 Minden
Phone: +49 (0) 57 18 30 - 0

Fax: +49 (0) 57 18 30 - 18 60

Subject to technical changes
These operating instructions are proteced by copyright law. Translating, photocopying and diseminating
it in any form whatsoever - even editings or excerpts thereof - especially as reprint, photomechanical or
electronic reproduction or storage on data processing systems or networks is not allowed without the per-
mission of the copyright owner and non-compliance will lead to both civil and criminal prosecution.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2.1 . DTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2.2 . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2.3 . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
2.4 . Adding a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
2.5 . Saving a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2.6 . Changing the COM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2.7 . Changing the bus address in the project structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.8 . Project manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2.9 . Changing the bus address of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1 . Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
3.2 . Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3 . Load from device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.4 . Save in the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5 . Load data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.6 . Save data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.7 . Select and load data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
3.8 . Save as data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
3.9 . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.10 TZID-C/TZID-C200 main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
4.1 . Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.1 . Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.1 . Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.1.1 Travel counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.1.2 Stroke counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.2 . Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7 Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.1 . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.1.1 Final control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
42/63-24 EN DTM for TZID-C/TZID-C200, HART communication, (TOC) 3

Table of contents
7.1.2 Additional data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.1.3 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.2 . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.2.1 Effective variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.2.2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
7.3 . Inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7.3.1 Digital input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7.3.2 Alarm messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7.4 . User-specific characteristic curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.5 . Control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.5.1 KP value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.5.2 TV value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.5.3 Go pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.5.4 Output offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.5.5 ADC noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.5.6 I/P module type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.6 . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.6.1 Deadband time limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.6.2 Travel counter limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.6.3 Stroke counter limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.6.4 Stroke limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.1 . Reset device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.2 . Load factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.3 . Autoadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.4 . Start Autoadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.5 . Autoadjustment state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.6 . Signal simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
42/63-24 EN DTM for TZID-C/TZID-C200, HART communication, (TOC) 4

General safety instructions
1 General safety instructions

Safety This chapter contains important instructions for your safety!
instructions Read and observe!
Instructions for These operating instructions are a reference manual for the DTM of the TZID-C or TZID-C200 intelligent
proper use positioner (HART communication).
Loading the factory Prior to commissioning, especially when using ex-stock or old devices, load the factory setting.
setting
National standards The regulations, standards and directives referred to in these operating instructions are applicable in Ger-
and regulations: many. When using the TZID-C or TZID-C 200 positioner outside the German Federal jurisdiction, the rel-
evant standards, regulations and directives applicable in the country where the device is used must be
observed.
Marking important The following symbols are used for marking text sections that contain essential information for your safety
information or for proper use.
WARNING This symbol is printed next to warnings indicating a direct endangerment

of a person's health or life.Observe these instructions. Inform all other us-
ers involved.
Also observe the general safety instructions, and the regulations for the
prevention of accidents.
CAUTION This symbol is printed next to cautions indicating that the relevant
standards, regulations and directives and the respective notes in
this manual must be observed and that the work on the device must be
performed in the described order to prevent damage or destruction of the
device.
• General list
Table 1-1 Symbols and their meaning
2 General
2.1 DTM
The DTM – Device Type Manager – is the basis of the FDT concept. This component is provided by the
vendor of the intelligent field instruments.
The DTM 'knows' all device rules, contains the user dialogs, provides for the device configuration and
diagnostics, and generates the device-specific documentation.
Further field instruments can be added as required and at any time, since the respective DTMs can be
loaded easily.
Note that it is not possible to run several DTMs in parallel under Windows 95/98. If you are using one of
these operating systems and call up several DTMs simultaneously, the operational reliability of your op-
erating system is no longer ensured.
2.2 Installation
Insert the CD ROM disk into your CD-ROM drive.
Close all Windows95/98/2000/NT applications and click on the Windows Start button.
Choose the <Run> command from the Start pull-down menu. Type the CD-ROM drive indicator and a
colon (e.g. “D:“) and then "setup".
Click on the OK button or press the <ENTER> key to confirm your entries and start the installation.
The DTM will be installed automatically. Upon successful installation your computer has to be restarted.
42/63-24 EN DTM for TZID-C/TZID-C200, HART communication, Section 1 5

General
2.3 Communication
Fig. 2-1 Setting up communication
Select “Project” -> “New” to call up the appropriate window and select the communication interface.
Choose "HART 5.1, FSK Modem, LKS-Adapter“ for a connection via LKS adapter and FSK modem.
Confirm with OK or <ENTER>.
2.4 Adding a device
Fig. 2-2 Adding a device
Call up the device list via “Project” -> “Edit”. You can add any of the displayed devices to your project
structure. Click with the left mouse button on the respective device(s), hold the mouse button down, drag
the mouse cursor to the COM2: HART 5.1. field in the left window, and then release the mouse button
(drag & drop operation). The device(s) will be inserted.

General
2.5 Saving a project

Select "Project” -> "Save” to save the current project structure.
2.6 Changing the COM interface

Click with the left mouse button on the serial PC interface (COM interface) that you want to change. Select
“Edit” -> “Change address/name”. A selection window with the available interfaces pops up. Select the
wanted COM interface and confirm with "Done".
2.7 Changing the bus address in the project structure

Click with the left mouse button on the respective device in the project structure. Select “Edit” -> “Change
address/name” to call up the bus address selection window. Mark the respective bus address and confirm
with "Done".
Note that this will only change the bus address in the project structure, not in the device! See “Changing
the bus address of the device” on page 7.
2.8 Project manager
Fig. 2-3 Project manager
Select "Project” -> "Back to project mananager” to return to the window from where you can establish a
connection to the devices.
2.9 Changing the bus address of the device

Click with the left mouse button to select the respective interface from the project manager. Select "Find
device” -> "Bus device.” SMART VISION will search for connected devices. Click with the right mouse
button to select the respective device from the displayed list. Select "Change slave address” to call up
the appropriate window from where you can write the new bus address into the device.

Device
3 Device
3.1 Connect
Open the project manager and click with the left mouse button on the respective device in the project
manager to establish a connection with this device. Then click with the right mouse button and select
"Connect“ -> "More“.
Once the connection has been established, the COM LED in the bottom right corner of the SMART
VISION main window starts flashing, and the device name in the project manager is indicated in bold
characters.
Note If the device name is displayed in red, this means that connection setup to the device has failed. In this
case check the cables for proper connection, and if the proper serial interface and communication proto-
col has been selected. It is also possible that the device bus address is not identical with the address in
the project tree.
You can call up the context menu by actuating the right mouse button. From this window you can return
to the main window by selecting the appropriate menu item.
3.2 Disconnect
Select "Device" -> "Disconnect" to interrupt the connection to a device. You can also click with the left
mouse button on the respective device in the project tree, click with the right mouse button to open the
appropriate pull-down menu, and then select menu item "Disconnect".
3.3 Load from device

Call up the information window from the TZID-C or TZID-C200 main window. All device data indicated in
blue are different from the loaded data set.
Select "Device" -> "Load from device" to read out the current device data.
Windows highlighted yellow cannot be edited. Windows with white background can be edited upon click-
ing with the left mouse button.
Note The "Load from device" function must be repeated for every window. The respective device must have
been selected under "View" and "Source".
Comments are not loaded from the device, but from the data set.
3.4 Save in the device

All device data indicated in blue are different from the loaded data set.
Select "Device" -> "Save in device" to save the device data in the device.
Note You can save comments for each data set.
3.5 Load data set

Select "Device" -> "Load data set" to load the data from the device data set. These are the data last
saved. When calling up the data set for the first time, the default data set is loaded.
3.6 Save data set

Select "Device" -> "Save data set" to save the current data in the device data set.
3.7 Select and load data set

With "Select and load data set" you can define the file from which the saved data of the device shall be
loaded.
3.8 Save as data set

Here you can create a new file in which the device data will be saved.
3.9 Print
This menu item calls up the print preview. Select "Edit" -> "Create print file with default template" to dis-
play all data of the device data set. The data can then be output via "File" -> "Print".

Display
3.10 TZID-C/TZID-C200 main window
Fig. 3-1 TZID-C/TZID-C200 main window
From the main window you can call up all windows for operating/configuring the program.
A message in the status line at the bottom of the window indicates whether or not the device is connected,
which data source is being used (data set or device ), and the user access level.
4 Display
4.1 Log
In this window you can start logging of four positioner parameters in parallel at selectable intervals.
Under "Options" you can select the parameters that are to be logged. Additionally, the time interval
(1…3600 seconds) can be defined.

Operation
5 Operation
5.1 Positioner
Fig. 5-1 Positioner
The valve range, stroke range, setpoint and control deviation of are represented in graphical form in this
window.
Additionally, it can seen whether or not the stroke range is smaller than the actual valve range, and the
instantaneous input current and device temperature are indicated.
The “Direct value” button can be used to enter a manual setpoint, to which the final control element can
be moved independently of the input signal.
Note With “Direct value“ the device ignores the 4...20 mA setpoint signal.
6 Diagnostics
6.1 Load
6.1.1 Travel counter

In this window the instantaneous value of the travel counter can be displayed and, if required, can be re-
set.
6.1.2 Stroke counter

In this window the instantaneous value of the stroke counter can be displayed and, if required, can be
reset.
6.2 Messages
In this window messages are indicated, e.g. when the limits are exceeded.

Configure
7 Configure
7.1 General
7.1.1 Final control elements

The following information is indicated in this window:
– FSK bus address
– Device manufacturer
– Device type
– Device ID
– Serial number
– Device version
– Software version
– Hardware version
– Device state
The following data can be edited in this window

– Communication name
– Plant tag of the final control element
– Device date
– General plant description
– Additional plant description
7.1.2 Additional data

This window provides the following information:
– I/P module type
– I/P module serial number
– Sensor type
– Sensor number
7.1.3 Comments
In this window you can enter comments or special information e.g. date and scope of the last valve main-
tenance. This information will be saved in the data set.
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Effective variables
7.2.1.1 Setpoint range

With this function you can define the setpoint range between 4.0 and 20mA. The setpoint range is always
scaled to the configured stroke range (0...100%) of the device.
The setpoint range factory setting is 4.0...20.0mA.
Example: Split-Range
It is possible to run two series-connected positioners on a single setpoint source by configuring the first
device for a range of 4.0...12.0mA and the second one for 12.0...20mA. Overlaps or gaps between the
setpoint ranges can be configured as required.
Note The setpoint range must not be smaller than 10% (1.6mA).

Configure
7.2.1.2 Characteristic curve

With this function you can configure the characteristic curve for the setpoint channel. The following op-
tions can be selected:
– Linear
– Equal percentage 1:25
– User-configurable
Note Selecting a user-configurable characteristic curve is only possible if such a curve has been defined before
under "Extension“ -> "Special data“.
In factory the device is set to a linear characteristic curve.
7.2.1.3 Valve action

With this function you can define the valve action for the setpoint channel ("Direct" or "Reverse").
The factory setting is "Direct".
7.2.1.4 Tolerance band

With this function you can define the tolerance band for control.
Enter the tolerance band within the range of 0.30...10.00% in steps of 0.05 %. The tolerance band defines
a +/- range around the setpoint. When the valve position is within this range, the controlled system is
considered as balanced. If the valve is not controlled smoothly by the positioner, the tolerance band
should be increased. If the positioner does not reach the set position exactly enough, the tolerance band
should be decreased.
The tolerance band factory setting is 0.30%.
7.2.1.5 Shut-off value

With this function you can define the shut-off value.
When the setpoint reaches the shut-off value, the valve is immediately driven to the 0% stroke limit.
Enter a value between 0.0 and 20.0%.
7.2.1.6 Setpoint ramp

With this function you can define a setpoint ramp for control.
A setpoint change is not directly transferred to the controller, but with the defined time function.
Note The setpoint ramp is only active during control. The set values should always be greater than the actual
stroke times. The setpoint ramp is disabled in manual mode and when the device is moving to the safe
position.
Enter the setpoint ramps separately for each moving direction (up and down) for the entire valve stroke
within a range of 0...200 seconds. A value of 0 seconds will switch off this function. “Down” refers to a
moving direction towards the 0% stroke limit, "up" refers to a moving direction towards the 100% stroke
limit.
The setpoint ramp factory setting is 0 seconds (OFF).
7.2.1.7 Stroke time

This parameter is determined by the Autoadjust function and is then indicated as the shortest possible
stroke time over the entire valve range.
7.2.1.8 Deadband time limit

With this function you can monitor the valve stroke time in control mode.
As soon as the valve position is outside the tolerance band, it is monitored if the setpoint is reached within
the set time. Otherwise, an alarm is signalled. The respective alarm message is indicated in the "Mes-
sages" window.

Configure
Enter the deadband time limit to be monitored within the range of 0...200 seconds. A value of 0 seconds
will switch off this function.
If the optional module for "Digital position feedback" is present, the alarm output is enabled. The alarm
will be reset when the set position is reached.
Note Make sure that the deadband time limit is always greater than the actual stroke time.
The factory setting of the deadband time limit is 0 seconds (OFF).
7.2.2 Adjustment
7.2.2.1 Lever zero position

With this function you can assign an end position to the lever range zero positions.
This parameter defines whether the zero position of the actuator is assigned to the stops reached when
the lever shaft is turning counterclockwise or clockwise (seen from the device front).
The lever zero position is not determined by the Autoajdust function. It has to be derived from the lever
link and from the intended zero position of the valve.
7.2.2.2 Actuator spring action

With this function you can define the end position to which a single-action actuator is set by the spring.
Note Usually, this parameter is determined by the Autoadjust function with valve stops. When using the Auto-
adjust function without stops, this parameter must be set properly.
This parameter defines whether the spring moves the feedback shaft with depressurized valve chamber
to the end position when turning counterclockwise or clockwise (seen from the device front).In the case
of a double-acting actuator the spring action corresponds to pressurizing the pneumatic output Y2.
Changing the spring action may cause a sudden movement of the actuator upon data transfer to the de-
vice.
When using the Autoadjust function with control data, only, the "Actuator spring action" parameter must
be set properly.
7.2.2.3 Actuator type

With this parameter you can define the positioner for operation on a linear or rotary actuator.
7.2.2.4 Valve range limits

This parameter indicates whether the valve range was limited as compared to the actual stroke range,
such that the mechanical limit stops of the valve are no longer reached. In this case the actuator is not
fully pressurized/depressurized when reaching the high or low end position. This may be useful, espe-
cially if the valve has a tendency to swing through.
7.2.2.5 Stroke range limits

With this function you can limit the stroke range as compared to the actual valve stroke.
Enter the range between 0.0 and 100%. If the stroke range is limited, only a part of the actual mechanical
valve stroke is covered by the set point range.
The setpoint range always refers to the stroke range.
Not that any change of the stroke range changes the absolute positions of the switching points as com-
pared to the valve position.
If the stroke range is limited, (<100%) the mechanical stops of the valve are nor longer reached by fully
depressurizing or pressurizing.
The stroke range limitation is only active in control mode. In manual mode it is still possible to use the full
mechanical valve stroke. In case of a power failure and fail-safe positioning through the I/P module, the
valve is set to the mechanical end positions.
The stroke range factory setting is 0.0...100.0%.

Configure
Example 1:
The valve shall not close fully with minimum setpoint, to ensure a minimum flow. In this case the low
stroke range limit has to be set to the wanted minimum stroke.
Example 2:
The valve must not exceed a maximum flow, even with maximum setpoint. In this case the high stroke
range limit has to be set to the wanted maximum stroke.
7.2.2.6 Switching points

With this function you can define the switching points. When the valve position is below the low switching
point or above the high switching point, the respective message is shown in the "Display measured value"
window.
If the option module for "Digital position feedback" is present, the "Min." switching output (terminals 41,42)
is activated when the value is below the low switching point. If the high switching point is exceeded, the
"Max." switching output (terminals 51 and 52) is activated.
Enter the high or low switching point in the range between 0.0 and 100.0%. The percentage values refer
to the configured stroke range.
Note Not that any change of the stroke range changes the absolute positions of the switching points as com-
pared to the valve position. The defined deadband is used as the hysteresis range for resetting the active
switching points.
The switching point factory setting is 0% and 100%.
7.3 Inputs/outputs
7.3.1 Digital input

With this parameter you can define the function/reaction if no external 12 V DC voltage is applied.
– no function (in this case, the TZID-C or TZID-C200 positioner does not require an external 12 V DC
voltage across its digital input for proper operation).
– move to 0% position
– move to 100% position
– hold current position
– local configuration locked; local operation is still possible
– local operation is locked
– both local operation and external configuration are locked
7.3.2 Alarm messages

Here you can define which alarm messages are to be signalled and output via the digital output as a cur-
rent signal (Namur).

Configure
7.4 User-specific characteristic curve
Fig. 7-7 User-specific characteristic curve
Here you can either edit the 20 reference points of a user-defined characteristic curve or load/save a char-
acteristic curve.
7.5 Control parameters
7.5.1 KP value
With this function you can define the KP value.
Note Note that all control parameters are determined in an optimum way for most of the actuators by the Au-
toadjust function. Changes should only be made when Autoadjust cannot be executed or control stability
cannot be achieved.
To compensate for existing dissymmetries in the controlled system, the KP value is to be set separately
for both directions (up/down).
Enter a KP value in the range between 1.0 and 400,0.
Definition The KP value is a gain of the PD controller and results in a positioning signal of 100% for KP=1 and a
control deviation of 100%.
The KP value influences the controlling speed and stability. With higher KP values the controlling speed
increases.
Note that the control accuracy is not affected by the KP value!
Hints for setting For most actuators sufficient control action can be achieved with a KP value between 2.0 and 10.0.
Choosing a KP value smaller than 5.0 can, despite the go pulse, result in starting times longer than 400
milliseconds. In such a case you can shorten the starting time without impairing the stability of the control
loop by proportionally increasing the KP and TV values.
If the control loop continues to show instable behavior, even if the KP value has been decreased, a too
high offset has been chosen for the output value or other parameters are highly unbalanced.

Configure
7.5.2 TV value
With this function you can define the TV value.
The TV value is usually determined by the Autoadjust function and defines the derivative time of the PD
controller.
The TV value factory setting is 0.04 seconds.
cannot be achieved.
To compensate for existing dissymmetries in the controlled system, the TV value is to be set separately
Enter the TV value within the range of 10...800 milliseconds.
Definition The TV value is the derivative time of the PD controller and results, for example, in an output signal of
100% for TV=100 ms in balanced condition, together with KP=1 for a dynamic control deviation of 100%/
100 ms.
Speed and stability are affected by the TV value in such a way that it counteracts dynamically to the KP
value. With higher TV values the controlling speed decreases.
Hints for setting For most actuators satisfactory control action is achieved with a TV value between 20 and 200 ms.
In manual configuration choose a TV value of approximately 8...10 * KP value [msec].
7.5.3 Go pulse
With this function you can define the go pulse.
cannot be achieved.
To compensate for existing dissymmetries in the controlled system, the go pulse is to be set separately
Enter a go pulse between 0 and 200 milliseconds in steps of 20 milliseconds.
Definition The controller issues an amplified positioning signal for the defined pulse length and with the actuator not
moving, in order to achieve accelerated starting of the actuator.
In this way the time required to build the pressure needed to begin moving the actuator is reduced.
Hints for setting The value determined by Autoadjust should NOT be increased, as this may result in overshooting! If the
actuator consistently overshoots the setpoint, decrease the go pulse.
For small and fast actuators it may be necessary to set the go pulse to 0, even if Autoadjust has deter-
mined a higher value.
7.5.4 Output offset

With this function you can define the output offset.
cannot be achieved.
To compensate for existing dissymmetries in the controlled system, the output offset is to be set sepa-
rately for both directions (up/down).
Enter an offset value between [minOffset] and 100%.
Definition The "offset for the output signal" linearizes the behavior of the I/P module used and enables fast control
even for small control deviations. The value is limited a the low end by a minimum value (neutral zone).
The offset substantially affects the controlling speed for control deviations smaller than 5%. In manual
mode the offset values are issued for fine adjustment to the I/P module.

Configure
Hints for setting For most actuators satisfactory control is achieved with offset values between 40 and 80%.
If the valve overshoots, both offset values should be decreased.
Both offset values should be increased if the actuator stops outside the tolerance band. For larger, slower
actuators Autoadjust may determine values higher than 80%. In these cases there will be no noticeable
difference between fine and coarse adjustment while in manual mode.
7.5.5 ADC noise

With this function you can define the noise band of the AD converter.
cannot be achieved.
Enter a noise band between 0.03 and 0.1% referred to the lever range.
Definition The noise band defines the smallest measurable stroke change in the lever range. This value depends
on the quality of the ADC and on external disturbances.
The possible control accuracy is given by the triple noise band. This means the noise band defines the
smallest strokes which can still be recognized by the PD controller.
Hints for setting The noise band only has to be set manually of the Autoadjust function cannot be executed. Usually, it
noise band of up to 0.03% is sufficient.
7.5.6 I/P module type

In this field the installed I/P module type and its safe position are indicated.
7.6 Monitoring
7.6.1 Deadband time limit

With this function you can monitor the valve stroke time in control mode.
As soon as the valve position is outside the tolerance band, it is monitored if the setpoint is reached within
the set time. Otherwise, an alarm is signalled. The alarm message is displayed in the "Display measured
value" window.
Enter the deadband time limit to be monitored within the range of 0...200 seconds. A value of 0 seconds
will switch off this function.
If the optional module for "Digital position feedback" is present, the alarm output is enabled. The alarm
will be reset when the set position is reached.
Note Make sure that the deadband time limit is always greater than the actual stroke time.
The factory setting of the deadband time limit is 0 seconds (OFF).
7.6.2 Travel counter limit

With this function you can configure the travel counter in the device.
The totalizes the total travel of the valve stem in %.
Limits in the range of 0...4.294.967.295 can be configured for the travel counter. When the counter reach-
es the limit value, an alarm is signalled if this has been configured before under "Inputs/outputs".
In the factory setting the counter is reset, and a limit value of 1,000,000 is set.
7.6.3 Stroke counter limit

With this function you can configure the stroke counter in the device.
Every stroke that is greater than the stroke hysteresis (measured from the most distant position of the last
direction change) is counted in the positioner.
Limits in the range of 0...4.294.967.295 can be configured for the stroke counter. When the counter
reaches the limit value, an alarm is signalled, provided that this has been configured before under "Inputs/
outputs" and then saved in the device.
In the factory setting the counter is reset, and a limit value of 100,000 is set.

Service
7.6.4 Stroke limit

Here you can define the stroke hysteresis that the stroke counter shall interpret as a stroke.
The stroke hysteresis can be configured in the range of 1...100%.
In the factory setting the stroke hysteresis is reset to 50%.
8 Service
8.1 Reset device
This function is used to re-initialize the device. All data that have not been stored in the non-volatile mem-
ory will be erased.
8.2 Load factory setting

This function is used to re-initialize the device. All data saved in the non-volatile memory will be erased,
and the factory setting will be restored.
8.3 Autoadjust
With this parameter you can define the type and scope of the autoadjustment function.
The following options can be selected:
– Full autoadjustment
– Stops only
– Control parameters only
– Zero only (requires parameterized stops)
8.4 Start Autoadjust

With this function you can externally start the autoadjustment, provided that the lock is
disabled.
The autoadjustment can be terminated at any time by using the <Cancel> button in the information win-
dow. All parameter data determined up to this moment will be rejected, and the previous data will be re-
stored.
If you choose the reduced autoadjustment function where only the control parameters are determined,
make sure that the “Valve range“ and “Actuator spring action“ parameters were set properly.
8.5 Autoadjustment state

With this function you can display the type and scope of autoadjustment.
8.6 Signal simulation

With this parameter you can simulate an actuator position in order to activate the software contacts and
check the analog position feedback. This is especially useful in the commissioning phase when checking
the cables.
ABB Automation Products GmbH Subject to technical changes

Schillerstrasse 72 Printed in the Fed. R. of Germany
42/63-24 EN Rev. 01
D-32425 Minden Issue 01.02
Phone +49 (0) 57 18 30 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 57 18 30 - 18 60
http://www.abb.com
Bulletin 71.1:67C
March 2004
67C Series Instrument Supply Regulators

✰ Designed for Digital Instrumentation
✰ Optional Smart Bleed™ Construction

A 67CF Series filter
✰ Optional Stainless Steel Construction regulator shown with

optional pressure gauge
✰ Compact and Light Weight
✰ No Air Loss
✰ Easy Maintenance
✰ Optional Integral Filter

W7412
✰ Optional Internal Relief Valve
✰ Rugged Construction
A 67C Series instrument
supply regulator
W8438
A 67CF Series regulator used

as a supply regulator for
digital instrumentation
A 67CF Series regulator used as

W7426
a pilot supply regulator for the
Type 299H pressure regulator
W7423_1
D102656X012
www.FISHERregulators.com
Bulletin 71.1:67C
Introduction
The 67C Series regulators are typically used to provide constantly controlled, reduced pressures to pneumatic and
electropneumatic controllers and other instruments. These direct-operated regulators are suitable for most air or
gas applications. Other applications include providing reduced pressures to air chucks, air jets, and spray guns.
Features • Internal Relief—The Types 67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR,

• Compact—The 67C Series regulators are engi- and 67CFSR have an internal relief valve with a soft
neered for outstanding performance in a compact, seat for reliable shutoff with no discernible leakage.
light-weight package. These regulators are recommended for conserving
plant air.
• Panel Mounting—Panel mount construction
includes spring case with 1/4-inch NPT vent, • Smart Bleed™—Opens to exhaust downstream
handwheel adjusting screw, and mounting nut. pressure when inlet pressure drops below outlet
pressure. Recommended for deadend service.
• Instrument Supply Regulator—The Types 67CF,
67CFR, 67CFS, and 67CFSR provide a clean air • Integral Filter—The Types 67CF, 67CFR, 67CFS,
and 67CFSR have an integral filter ensuring clean
supply to a variety of pneumatic and electro-pneumatic
downstream air supply.
instrumentation.
• Ease of Maintenance—No special tools are
• Digital Instrument Supply Regulator—Designed
required to perform maintenance, and all maintenance
for the accuracy, repeatability, and hysteresis de-
can be performed with the regulator in the line. Filter
mands of digital instrumentation.
elements are easily replaced. The one-piece valve
• Pilot Supply Regulator—Improves the accuracy plug cartridge allows easy inspection and replacement.
of two-path control regulators by reducing inlet sensi- • Rugged Construction—The 67C Series regulators
tivity caused by fluctuating inlet pressures. are engineered for longer service life with minimal
• Pressure Loading Regulator—Provides accuracy maintenance requirements.
and improved performance in dirty steam service by • Second Outlet—Body side outlet for pressure
eliminating the need for a pilot regulator (see figure 3). gauge or other uses.
• Sour Gas Service Capability—NACE MR0175 and • Powder Paint Coating—Types 67C, 67CR, 67CF,
MR0103 compliant construction available. and 67CFR are powder paint coated, offering impact,
• Optional Stainless Steel Construction—The abrasion, and corrosion resistance. Stainless steel
Types 67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS and 67CFSR provide high regulators (Types 67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS and 67CFSR)
resistance to corrosion especially beneficial in offshore are not painted.
applications. • Corrosion Resistant Fasteners—Bolting and
• Full Usable Capacity—Fisher regulators are adjusting screw are double zinc-chromated for en-
laboratory tested. 100 percent of the published hanced corrosion resistance. Optional stainless steel
capacities can be used with confidence. bolting and adjusting screw are also available.
Table 1. Outlet Pressure Ranges and Control Spring Data
OUTLET PRESSURE RANGES, CONTROL SPRING DATA

Type
PSIG (bar) Color Material Part Number Wire Diameter, Inch (mm)
0 to 20 (0 to 1,4) green stripe GE07809T012 0.135 (3,43)
0 to 35 (0 to 2,4) silver T14059T0012 0.156 (3,96)
Music Wire
0 to 60 (0 to 4,1) blue stripe T14058T0012 0.170 (4,32)
67C, 67CR,
0 to 125 (0 to 8,6) red stripe T14060T0012 0.207 (5,26)
67CF, 67CFR
0 to 35 (0 to 2,4) silver stripe T14113T0012 0.156 (3,96)
0 to 60 (0 to 4,1) blue Inconel T14114T0012 0.172 (4,37)
0 to 125 (0 to 8,6) red T14115T0012 0.207 (5,26)
0 to 20 (0 to 1,4) green 10C1729X012 0.135 (3,43)
0 to 35 (0 to 2,4) silver stripe T14113T0012 0.156 (3,96)
67CS, 67CSR,
0 to 60 (0 to 4,1) blue Inconel T14114T0012 0.172 (4,37)
67CFS, 67CFSR
0 to 125 (0 to 8,6) red T14115T0012 0.207 (5,26)
0 to 150 (0 to 10,3) black 10C1730X012 0.250 (6,35)
2
Bulletin 71.1:67C
Specifications
Body Size, Inlet and Outlets Connection Style Smart Bleed™ Check Valve Setpoint
1/4-inch NPT 6 psi (0,4 bar) differential
Construction Materials Pressure Registration
See Table 2 Internal
(1)
Maximum Inlet Pressure (Body Rating) Drain Valve and Spring Case Vent Location
All except 67CS and 67CSR: 250 psig (17,2 bar) Aligned with inlet standard, other positions optional
Type 67CS and 67CSR: 400 psig (27,6 bar)
Regulator Temperature Capabilities
Outlet Pressure Ranges
With Nitrile (NBR)
See Table 1
Standard Bolting: -20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C)
Maximum Emergency Outlet Pressure(1) Stainless Steel Bolting: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C)
50 psi (3,4 bar) over outlet pressure setting With Fluoroelastomer (FKM):
0 to 300°F (-18 to 149°C)
Capacities
With Silicone (VMQ)(3) Diaphragm and Low
See Table 3 and Capacity Information section Temperature bolting: -60 to 180°F (-51 to 82°C)
Wide-Open Flow Coefficients With Gauges: -20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C)
Main Valve: Cg: 11.7; Cv: 0.36; C1: 32.2; Type 67CF, 67CFR, 67CFS, and 67CFSR Filter
Internal Relief Valve: Cg: 1.45; Cv: 0.045; C1: 32.8 Capabilities
IEC Sizing Cooefficients Free Area: 12 times pipe area
Main Valve: XT: 0.66; FL: 0.89; FD: 0.50 Micron Rating: Cellulose Element: 40 microns
Glass Fiber Element: 5 microns
Accuracy Stainless Steel Element: 40 microns
Inlet Sensitivity: Less than 0.2 psig (0,014 bar)
Options
change in outlet pressure for every 25 psig
(1,72 bar) change in inlet pressure All Types
Repeatability: 0.1 psig (0,0069 bar)(2) • Handwheel adjusting screw
• Inlet screen
Air Consumption: testing repeatedly shows
• NACE MR0175(4) or NACE MR0103 construction
no discernible leakage
• Panel mount (includes spring case with 1/4-inch
Type 67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR, and 67CFSR Internal vent, handwheel, and panel mounting nut)
Relief Performance • Closing cap (available on spring case with
Low capacity for minor seat leakage only; other 1/4-inch NPT vent)
overpressure protection must be provided if inlet • Fluoroelastomer (FKM) elastomers for high
pressure can exceed the maximum pressure rating temperatures and/or corrosive chemicals
of downstream equipment or exceeds maximum • Silicone (VMQ) elastomers for cold temperatures
outlet pressure rating of the regulator. • Fixed Bleed Restriction
• Triple scale outlet pressure gauge (brass or
Approximate Unit Weight stainless steel)
Types 67C, 67CR, 67CF, and 67CFR: • Stainless steel stem on the valve plug
1 pound (0,5 kg) • Tire valve or pipe plug in second outlet
Types 67CS and 67CSR: Type 67CFR only
2.5 pounds (1,2 kg) • Smart Bleed™ internal check valve
Types 67CFS and 67CFSR: Types 67CF and 67CFR only
4 pounds (1,8 kg) • Stainless steel drain valve
1. The pressure/temperature limits in this bulletin and any applicable standard or code limitation should not be exceeded.
2. Repeatability is the measure of the regulator's ability to return to setpoint consistently when traveling from steady state to transient to steady state.
3. Silicone is not compatible with hydrocarbon gas.
4. Product complies with the material requirements of NACE MR0175. Environmental limits may apply.
3
Bulletin 71.1:67C
TYPE 67CR OR 67CSR TYPE 67CF OR 67CFS
TYPE 67C OR 67CS
INLET PRESSURE W7433
OUTLET PRESSURE
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE TYPE 67CFR OR 67CFSR SMART BLEED™ OPTION
TYPE 67CFR ONLY
Figure 2. 67C Series Operational Schematics
Table 2. 67C Series Construction Materials

TYPE
MATERIAL
67C and 67CR 67CF and 67CFR 67CS and 67CSR 67CFS and 67CFSR
Body and
Aluminum (ASTM B85/Alloy 380) CF8M/CF3M Stainless steel
Spring Case
Bottom Plate 316 Stainless steel --- 316 Stainless Steel ---
Pusher Post and Valve
Polyester resin
Cartridge
Upper Spring Seat Zinc-plated Steel 316 Stainless steel
Lower Spring Seat,
Chromate conversion coated aluminum 316 Stainless steel
Diaphragm Plate
Control Spring Plated Steel or Inconel (NACE) Inconel
Brass stem with Nitrile plug,
316 Stainless steel stem with
Valve Plug Aluminum stem with Nitrile or Fluoroelastomer plug, or
Nitrile or Fluoroelastomer plug
Stainless steel stem with Nitrile or Fluoroelastomer plug
Valve Spring Stainless steel or Inconel (NACE) Inconel
Diaphragm
Nitrile, Fluoroelastomer, or Silicone(1)
and O-Rings
Soft Seat and Gaskets Nitrile or Fluoroelastomer
Bolting, Adjusting
Zinc-plated steel or Stainless steel 316 Stainless steel
Screw, Locknut
Handwheel Zinc-plated steel screw with resin handwheel
316
Filter Retainer --- Plated Steel ---
Stainless steel
Cellulose, Glass fiber or
Filter Element --- ---
Glass fiber, or Stainless steel 316 Stainless steel
Brass or 316 Stainless Steel or
Drain Valve --- ---
Stainless steel 18-8 Stainless steel
Aluminum
Dripwell --- --- CF8M/CF3M Stainless steel
(ASTM B85/Alloy 380)
1. Silicone diaphragm only available with internal relief (67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR, 67CFSR).
4
Bulletin 71.1:67C
Principle of Operation (figure 2) leakage only. Other overpressure protection must be
provided if the maximum inlet pressure can exceed the
Downstream pressure is registered internally on the maximum pressure rating of the downstream equipment
lower side of the diaphragm. When the downstream or exceeds maximum outlet pressure rating of the
pressure is at or above the set pressure, the valve plug Type 67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR, or 67CFSR regulator.
is held against the orifice and there is no flow through
the regulator. When demand increases, downstream
pressure drops slightly allowing the spring to extend,
Capacity Information
moving the stem down and the valve plug away from Table 3 shows the air regulating capacities of the
the orifice. This allows flow through the regulator. 67C Series regulators at selected inlet pressures and
outlet pressure settings. Flows are shown in scfh
Internal Relief (Types 67CR, 67CSR, (at 60°F and 14.7 psia) and in m³/h(n) (at 0°C and
1,01325 bar) of air.
67CFR, and 67CFSR)
If for some reason, outside of normal operating Note
conditions, the downstream pressure exceeds the set The 67C Series regulators may be sized
point of the regulator, the force created by the for 100% flow using capacities as shown
downstream pressure will lift the diaphragm until the in table 3. It is not necessary to reduce
diaphragm is lifted off the relief seat. This allows flow published capacities.
through the token relief. The relief valve on the
Type 67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR, or 67CFSR is an elastomer To determine the equivalent capacities for other gases,
plug that prevents leakage of air from the downstream multiply the table capacity by the following appropriate
to atmosphere during normal operation, thereby conversion factor: 1.29 for 0.6 specific gravity natural
conserving plant air. gas, 0.810 for propane, 0.707 for butane, or 1.018 for
nitrogen. For gases of other specific gravities, divide
Smart Bleed™ Airset the table capacities by the square root of the appropri-
ate specific gravity. To find wide-open flow capacities
In some cases, it is desired to exhaust downstream
for relief sizing at any inlet pressure, perform one of
pressure if inlet pressure is lost or drops below the
the following procedures. Then, if necessary, convert
setpoint of the regulator. For example, if the regulator is
using the factors provided above.
installed on equipment that at times has no flow
demand but is expected to backflow on loss of inlet For critical pressure drops (absolute outlet pressure
pressure. The Type 67CFR can be ordered with the equal to or less than one-half of absolute inlet pres-
Smart Bleed™ option which includes an internal check sure), use the following formula:
valve for this application. During operation, if inlet
Q = (P1)(Cg)
pressure is lost, or decreases below the setpoint of the
regulator, the downstream pressure will back flow
For pressure drops lower than critical (absolute
upstream through the regulator and check valve. This
outlet pressure greater than one-half of absolute inlet
option eliminates the need for a fixed bleed downstream
pressure), use the following formula:
of the regulator, thereby conserving plant air.
520 ⎛ 3417 ∆P ⎞
Q= CgP1SIN ⎜⎜ ⎟ DEG
Overpressure Protection GT ⎝ C1 P1 ⎟⎠
The 67C Series regulators have maximum outlet where,
pressure ratings that are lower than their maximum
Q = gas flow rate, scfh
inlet pressure ratings. A pressure relieving or pressure
P1 = absolute inlet pressure, psia (P1 gauge + 14.7)
limiting device is needed if inlet pressure can exceed
the maximum outlet pressure rating. Refer to the Cg = gas sizing coefficient
Capacity Information section and the Wide-Open G = specific gravity of the gas
Coefficients for Relief Valve Sizing in the Specifica- T = absolute temperature of gas at inlet, °Rankine
tions on page 3 to determine the required relief valve C1 = flow coefficient (Cg ÷ Cv)
capacity. ∆P = pressure drop across the regulator, psi
Type 67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR, and 67CFSR regulators Then, if capacity is desired in normal cubic meters per
have a low capacity internal relief valve for minor seat hour (at 0°C and 1,01325 bar), multiply scfh by 0.0268.
5
Bulletin 71.1:67C
Table 3. Capacities
=OUTLET PRESSURE CAPACITIES IN SCFH (m3/h(n)) OF AIR
OUTLET
RANGE, SPRING PART INLET PRESSURE,
PRESSURE, Types 67C, 67CR, 67CS, and 67CSR Types 67CF, 67CFR, 67CFS, and 67CFSR
NUMBER AND COLOR, PSIG (bar)
PSIG (bar)
PSIG (bar) 10% Droop 20% Droop 10% Droop 20% Droop
50 (3,4) 250 (6,70) 430 (11,5) 250 (6,70) 430 (11,5)
75 (5,2) 340 (9,11) 610 (16,3) 300 (8,04) 690 (18,5)
100 (6,9) 430 (11,5) 800 (21,4) 330 (8,84) 1000 (26,8)
15 (1,0)
150 (10,3) 680 (18,2) 1200 (32,2) 400 (10,7) 1600 (42,9)
250 (17,2) 1300 (34,8) 1900 (50,9) 450 (12,1) 1800 (48,2)
400 (27,6)(2) 390 (10,5) 1850 (50,0) -- -- -- --
50 (3,4) 310 (8,31) 460 (12,3) 350 (9,38) 500 (13,4)
0 to 35 (0 to 2,4) 75 (5,2) 420 (11,3) 700 (18,8) 530 (14,2) 820 (22,0)
T14059T0012 (Silver) 100 (6,9) 620 (16,6) 940 (25,2) 750 (20,1) 1100 (29,5)
20 (1,4)
T14113T0012 150 (10,3) 960 (25,7) 1450 (38,9) 1400 (37,5) 1600 (42,9)
(Silver Stripe) 250 (17,2) 1550 (41,5) 2150 (57,6) 2550 (68,3) 2700 (72,3)
400 (27,6)(2) 1200 (32,2) 2750 (73,7) -- -- -- --
50 (3,4) 390 (10,5) 490 (13,1) 390 (10,5) 500 (13,4)
75 (5,2) 590 (15,8) 850 (22,8) 640 (17,1) 820 (22,0)
100 (6,9) 770 (20,6) 1150 (30,8) 840 (22,5) 1100 (29,5)
35 (2,4)
150 (10,3) 1200 (32,2) 1750 (46,9) 1450 (38,9) 1650 (44,2)
250 (17,2) 2200 (58,9) 2700 (72,3) 2450 (65,6) 2700 (72,3)
400 (27,6)(2) 2850 (76,4) 3450 (92,5) -- -- -- --
50 (3,4) 310 (8,31) 440 (11,8) 330 (8,84) 470 (12,6)
75 (5,2) 440 (11,8) 670 (18,0) 500 (13,4) 730 (19,6)
100 (6,9) 560 (15,0) 900 (24,1) 700 (18,8) 1000 (26,8)
35 (2,4)
150 (10,3) 780 (20,9) 1350 (36,2) 1050 (28,1) 1550 (41,5)
0 to 60 (0 to 4,1) 250 (17,2) 1450 (38,9) 2200 (59,0) 2000 (53,6) 2600 (69,7)
T14058T0012 400 (27,6)(2) 770 (20,6) 2500 (67,0) -- -- -- --
(Blue stripe)
T14114T0012 (Blue) 75 (5,2) 520 (13,9) 720 (19,3) 520 (13,9) 720 (19,3)
100 (6,9) 750 (20,1) 1050 (28,1) 770 (20,6) 1000 (26,8)
60 (4,1) 150 (10,3) 1100 (29,5) 1700 (45,6) 1100 (29,5) 1600 (42,9)
250 (17,2) 2050 (54,9) 2850 (76,4) 2450 (65,6) 2750 (73,7)
400 (27,6)(2) 3200 (85,8) 4300 (115) -- -- -- --
100 (6,9) 500 (13,4) 800 (21,4) 530 (14,2) 780 (20,9)
150 (10,3) 750 (20,1) 1200 (32,2) 780 (20,9) 1200 (32,2)
0 to 125 (0 to 8,6) 80 (5,5)
250 (17,2) 1200 (32,2) 2050 (54,9) 1250 (33,5) 2200 (58,9)
T14060T0012 400 (27,6)(2) 910 (24,4) 3700 (99,2) -- -- -- --
(Red stripe)
T14115T0012 (Red) 150 (10,3) 900 (24,1) 1250 (33,5) 900 (24,1) 1150 (30,8)
125 (8,6) 250 (17,2) 1560 (41,8) 2450 (65,6) 1650 (44,2) 2450 (65,6)
400 (27,6)(2) 2200 (59,0) 4350 (117) -- -- -- --
250 (17,2) 550 (14,7) 1200 (32,2) 550 (14,7) 1200 (32,2)
80 (5,5)
400 (27,6)(2) 400 (10,7) 1100 (29,5) -- -- -- --
0 to 150 (0 to 8,6)(1) 250 (17,2) 970 (26,0) 1800 (48,2) 1100 (29,5) 1800 (48,2)
135 (9,3)
10C1730X012 (Black) 400 (27,6)(2) 840 (22,5) 2350 (63,0) -- -- -- --
250 (17,2) 1100 (29,5) 1850 (49,6) 1100 (29,5) 1850 (49,6)
150 (10,3)
400 (27,6)(2) 940 (25,2) 2500 (67,0) -- -- -- --
1. Available for Types 67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS and 67CFSR only
2. Inlet pressures above 250 psig (17,2 bar) with a maximum of 400 psig (27,6 bar) only available on Types 67CS and 67CSR.
670 Series Panel-Mounted Loading connected to one or two gauges and a changeover
valve. A single gauge typically shows loading
Regulators (figure 4) pressure to the control valve. For more information
see bulletin 62.3:670.
The 670 Series panel-mounted loading regulators are
compact, rugged units used primarily for manually
loading pressure-balanced gas regulators and providing
manual control for diaphragm actuator control valves. Ordering Information
Applications include remote control of gas pressure to
burners in refineries, power plants, and various When ordering, complete the Ordering Guide on page
process furnaces. 12. Refer to the Specifications on page 3. Review the
description to the right of each specification and the
Three basic panels are available within the product information in each referenced table or figure. Specify
line, each having one 67C Series pressure regulator your choice whenever a selection is offered.
6
Bulletin 71.1:67C
67C SERIES
FILTER REGULATOR
UPSTREAM PRESSURE
LOADING PRESSURE
W7434
DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE TYPE 92P
STEAM REGULATOR
A 67C SERIES PRESSURE LOADING REGULATOR USED WITH THE TYPE 92P STEAM REGULATOR ELIMINATES THE NEED FOR A
PILOT REGULATOR. THIS PROVIDES HIGH ACCURACY AND IMPROVED PERFORMANCE IN DIRTY STEAM SERVICE.
Figure 3. 67C Series Regulator Used to Pressure Load a 92P Steam Regulator
1-GAUGE PANEL 2-GAUGE PANEL 2-GAUGE PANEL WITH

CHANGEOVER VALVE
Figure 4. 670 Series Typical Panel Layouts
7
Bulletin 71.1:67C
4.56 2.56
(116) (65)
2.92 0.50
(74) (13)
1.46
(37)
A
MAX
OUTLET
OPTIONAL GAUGE
CONNECTIONS
1/4-INCH NPT
INLET CONNECTION
1/4-INCH NPT
STANDARD DIMENSIONS
SIDE OUTLET
STANDARD DIMENSIONS
1/4-INCH NPT
FOR GAUGE OPTION 2.56
(65)
INCHES
(mm)
4.56 1.43
(116) (36)
CLOSING CAP
2.92
(74)
1.46
(37)
0.72-INCH (1,8 mm)

SPRING CASE
2.37 A
PANEL BOSS
(60) PANEL
MAX 0.12 TO 0.25
(3,0 TO 6,5)
A 1/4-INCH NPT VENT

MAX
D OUTLET
CONNECTIONS
C OPTIONAL GAUGE 1/4-INCH NPT
INLET CONNECTION
1/4-INCH NPT
SIDE OUTLET TAPPED

1/4-INCH NPT
DIMENSIONS FOR PANEL MOUNT OPTION WITH DIMENSIONS WITH CLOSING CAP
HAND WHEEL AND 1/4-INCH SPRING CASE VENT AND 1/4-INCH SPRING CASE VENT
DIMENSION WITH
STANDARD DIMENSIONS PANEL MOUNT OPTION WITH HANDWHEEL DIMENSIONS
TYPE CLOSING CAP
A B A A C D
67C , 67C R 3.50 (89) 1.51 (38) 4.60 (117) 4.69 (119) 1.08 (27) 2.33 (59)
67C S , 67C S R 4.13 (105) 1.62 (41) 4.93 (125) 5.00 (127) 1.14 (29) 2.65 (67)
Figure 5. Types 67C, 67CR, 67CS, and 67CSR Dimensions
8
Bulletin 71.1:67C
4.56
(116) 2.56
3.00
(65)
(76)
1.48 0.62
(38) (16)
3.50
(89)
INLET CONNECTION OUTLET

1/4-INCH NPT CONNECTIONS
1/4-INCH NPT
0.69
OPTIONAL GAUGE (18)
MOUNTING HOLES
3.50 FOR 5/16-INCH
(89) DIAMETER BOLTS
SIDE OUTLET
1/4-INCH NPT
2.25
(57)
B2699_A INCHES 2.87

(mm) (73)
B2699_B
DIMENSIONS
FOR GAUGE OPTION STANDARD DIMENSIONS
Figure 6. Types 67CF and 67CFR Dimensions
DRAIN VALVE
GAUGE
VENT POSITION 2 POSITION 4
DRAIN VALVE
VENT POSITION 1 POSITION 1 DRAIN VALVE
VENT POSITION 3 POSITION 3
(STANDARD) (STANDARD)
INLET OUTLET
INLET OUTLET
GAUGE
VENT POSITION 4
DRAIN VALVE
POSITION 2
B2699_D
B2699_C
VENT POSITIONS DRAIN VALVE POSITIONS
Figure 7. 67C Series Vent and Drain Valve Positions
9
Bulletin 71.1:67C
4.56 2.56
(116) (65)
3.00
(76) 1.43
(36) CLOSING CAP
2.37
(60) 1.48
MAX PANEL (38)
0.12 TO 0.25 0.72-INCH (1,8 mm)
(3,0 TO 6,5) SPRING CASE
PANEL BOSS
4.78
4.69
(121)
(119)
MAX
1/4-INCH NPT VENT
2.41
(61)
1.14 INLET CONNECTION OUTLET
(29) 1/4-INCH NPT CONNECTIONS
1/4-INCH NPT
0.69
OPTIONAL GAUGE (18)
MOUNTING HOLES
3.50 FOR 5/16-INCH
(89) DIAMETER BOLTS
SIDE OUTLET TAPPED

1/4-INCH NPT
2.25
(57)
B2700_A
INCHES 2.87
(mm) (73)
B2700_B
DIMENSIONS FOR PANEL MOUNT OPTION

WITH HAND WHEEL AND 1/4-INCH SPRING CASE VENT DIMENSIONS FOR CLOSING CAP OPTION
WITH 1/4-INCH SPRING CASE VENT
Figure 8. Types 67CF and 67CFR Dimensions (continued)
SPACER
(FOR INSTALLING A 67CF SERIES
REGULATOR IN AN EXISTING
0.18
INSTALLATION IF THE MOUNTING
(4,57)
BOLTS ARE TOO LONG)
0.50 OD 0.32
(12.7) ID
(8.12)
B2697_B
SPACER OUTER DIAMETER SPACER WIDTH AND

INNER DIAMETER
B2697_A
Figure 9. Spacer Dimensions and Installation Schematic
10
Bulletin 71.1:67C
4.56 1.43
(116) (36)
3.00 2.56
(76) (65)
1.48 0.62 CLOSING
(38) (16) CAP
VENT 1/4 NPT
4.93
(125)
1/4-INCH NPT INLET

CONNECTION
1/4-INCH NPT
OUTLET
1.14 CONNECTIONS
(29)
0.69
(18)
4.00 MOUNTING HOLES

(102) FOR 5/16-INCH
OPTIONAL DIAMETER BOLTS
GAUGE
1/4-INCH NPT
INLET CONNECTION
2.25
(57)
INCHES 2.87
(mm) (73)
STANDARD DIMENSIONS (INCLUDING CLOSING CAP) STANDARD DIMENSIONS (INCLUDING CLOSING CAP)
2.37
(60)
MAX
5.00
(127)
4.13
MAXIMUM
(105)
MAXIMUM PANEL
0.12-0.25 2.65
(3-6,5) (67)
INCHES
(mm)
DIMENSIONS WITHOUT CLOSING CAP DIMENSIONS FOR PANEL MOUNT OPTION WITH HANDWHEEL
Figure 10. Types 67CFS and 67CFSR Dimensions
11
Bulletin 71.1:67C
Ordering Guide Spring Case Vent Location (Select One)
Position 1 - Aligned with inlet (standard)***
Type (Select One) Position 2
Type 67C (aluminum without internal relief)*** Position 3
Type 67CR (aluminum with internal relief)*** Position 4
Type 67CS (stainless steel without internal relief)*** Fixed Bleed for Type 67CR, 67CSR, 67CFR, or 67CFSR (Optional)
Type 67CSR (stainless steel with internal relief)*** Yes**
Type 67CF (aluminum with filter and without internal relief)***
Type 67CFR (aluminum with filter and internal relief)*** Smart Bleed™ Internal Check Valve Airset (Optional - 67CFR only)
Type 67CFS (stainless steel with filter and without Yes**
internal relief)*** Second Outlet (Select One)
Type 67CFSR (stainless steel with filter and internal relief)*** Open (67C, 67CR, 67CF, 67CFR standard)***
Plugged with pipe plug (67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS, 67CFSR
Quantity (Specify)
standard)***
Spring Case Style (Select One) Tire Valve***
Drilled hole vent (67C, 67CR, 67CF, 67CFR standard)*** Pressure Gauge (see below)
1/4-inch NPT vent (67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS, 67CFSR standard)*** Triple Scale Pressure Gauge (Optional)
Single hole panel mount***
Brass Gauge or Stainless Steel Gauge
Adjusting Screw (Select One) 0 to 30 psig/0 to 0.2 MPa/0 to 2 bar***
Square head (67C, 67CR, 67CF, 67CFR standard)*** 0 to 60 psig/0 to 0.4 MPa/0 to 4 bar***
Square head with closing cap (67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS, 0 to 160 psig/0 to 1.1 MPa/0 to 11 bar***
67CFSR standard)*** NACE MR0175 Construction (Optional)(1)
Handwheel*** Yes (not available with gauge)**
Outlet Pressure Range (Select One) 1. Product complies with the material requirements of NACE MR0175.
0 to 20 psig (0 to 1,4 bar)*** Environmental limits may apply.
0 to 35 psig (0 to 2,4 bar)*** NACE MR0103 Construction (Optional)
0 to 60 psig (0 to 4,1 bar)*** Yes (not available with gauge)**
0 to 125 psig (0 to 8,6 bar)***
0 to 150 psig (0 to 10,3 bar) (67CS, 67CSR, 67CFS, 67CFSR Replacement Parts Kit (Optional)
only)*** Yes, send one replacement parts kit to match this order.
Diaphragm, O-Rings, and Valve Plug (Select One)
Nitrile (NBR) (standard)***
Fluoroelastomer (FKM)**
Silicone (VMQ) diaphragm, O-rings, and nitrile valve plug*
Filter Material (Select One)
Cellulose (40 microns)(67CF, 67CFR standard)***
Glass (5 microns)*** Specification Worksheet
Stainless steel (40 microns)(67CFS, 67CFSR standard)*** Application (Please designate units):
Drain Valve (Select One) Specific Use
Brass (67CF, 67CFR standard)*** Line Size
Stainless steel (67CFS, 67CFSR standard)*** Gas Type and Specific Gravity
Drain Valve Location (Select One) Gas Temperature
Position 1 - Aligned with inlet (standard)*** Does the Application Require Overpressure Protection?
Position 2 No Yes, if so, which is preferred:
Position 3 Relief Valve Monitor Regulator Shutoff Device
Position 4 Is overpressure protection equipment selection assistance
desired?
Pressure (Please designate units):
Maximum Inlet Pressure (P1max)
Fisher Regulators Quick Order Guide Minimum Inlet Pressure (P1min)
Downstream Pressure Setting(s) (P2)
*** Standard - Readily Available for Shipment Maximum Flow (Qmax)
** Non-Standard - Allow Additional Time for Shipment Performance Required:
Accuracy Requirements?
Special Order, Constructed from Non-Stocked Parts. Need for Extremely Fast Response?
*
Consult Your Fisher Sales Representative for Availability. Other Requirements:
Availability of the product being ordered is determined by the component
with the longest shipping time for the requested construction.
Fisher is a mark owned by Fisher Controls International, Inc., a business of Emerson Process Management. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. All other marks are the
property of their respective owners.
The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express
or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice.
Fisher does not assume responsibility for the selection, use or maintenance of any product. Responsibility for proper selection, use and maintenance of any Fisher product remains solely with the purchaser.
For information, contact Fisher:

Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 USA
McKinney, Texas 75070 USA
28320 Gallardon, France
40013 Castel Maggiore (BO), Italy
Sao Paulo 05424 Brazil
Singapore 128461
©Fisher Controls International, Inc., 2001, 2004; All Rights Reserved www.FISHERregulators.com
SOLENOID VALVES 3/2
2
direct operated, basic flow U
Series
balanced poppet 1 3 327
1/4
FEATURES
• The valves have TÜV certified IEC 61508 Functional Safety data and can be
used up to SIL-4
• The solenoid valves are recommended for pilot applications with basic flow,
wide pressure ranges and no minimum operating pressure
• PTFE rider rings and graphite-filled PTFE seals reduce friction and
eliminate sticking
• Coils used in metal enclosures have class H insulation materials
• Special execution for low power
• Special execution for extreme low ambient temperatures
• Peak voltage suppression diodes are standard in DC solenoids with metal
enclosures
• The solenoid valves satisfy all relevant EC Directives
GENERAL
Differential pressure 0 - 10 bar [1 bar = 100kPa]
Maximum viscosity 65cST (mm2/s)
Response times 75 - 100 ms
fluids () temperature range (TS) seal materials ()
-20 to +120°C FPM (fluoroelastomer)
air, inert gas, water, oil
-40 to + 40°C VMQ (silicone)
MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH FLUID

() Ensure that the compatibility of the fluids in contact with the materials is verified
Brass body Stainless steel body
Body Brass AISI 316L SS 1
Stem Stainless steel Stainless steel
Core tube Stainless steel Stainless steel 2
Core and plugnut Stainless steel Stainless steel 3
Springs Stainless steel Stainless steel
Sealings & poppets FPM or VMQ / LT-NBR FPM or VMQ / LT-NBR
Rider ring PTFE PTFE
BP
MP
RP
LP
1,8W 3,6W - 3,7W 5,7W - 5,8W 10,0W-11,2W
Low Reduced Medium Basic

power power power power
POWER LEVELS - cold electrical holding values (watt)
SPECIFICATIONS
flow operating pressure
prefix optional solenoids basic
pipe orifice coefficient Kv differential (bar) power
catalogue
size size port max. (PS) level NEMA ATEX/CENELEC
IP65 number
2➞1 / 3➞2 2➞1 / 3➞2 min. air/water () 7&9 EExd EExem Exmb EExn
 (mm) (m3/h) (l/m) ~/= ~/= EF (1) NF EM PV ZN SC brass stainless st.
U - Universal, FPM sealings and poppets
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 BP        327B001  327B002
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 MP -   -    327B201  327B202
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 RP -   -    327B101  327B102
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 LP -  - - - -  327B301  327B302
U - Universal, VMQ sealings and poppets
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 BP        327B011  327B012
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 MP -   -    327B211  327B212
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 RP -   -    327B111  327B112
1/4 5,7 0,45 7,5 0 10 LP -  - - - -  327B311  327B312
 Select 8 for NPT ANSI 1.20.3 ● Available feature - Not available
2008/R01
Select G for ISO G(228/1)  Available feature in DC only

(1)
Prefix EF and EV should always be used in conjunction with change letter H in the basic number
All leaflets are available on: www.asco-process-scope.com
PIC-2-50-GB
SERIES 327
PREFIX TABLE PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE
prefix description power level STEP 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LP RP MP BP Select basic catalogue number,
S C D U Dustproof ATEX (EN 50281-1-1)* -    including pipe thread indentification
E F Explosionproof - NEMA 3, 4, 6, 7, 9 - - -  letter. Refer to the specifications table
E V Explosionproof - NEMA 3, 4, 6, 7, 9 - 316 SS - - - 
on page 1.
E M Encapsulated ATEX + IECEx (EN/IEC 60079 / 61241)* -   
E T Threaded conduit/hole (M20 x 1.5) -    Example: 8327B001
I S S C Intrinsically safe with SC coil ATEX (EN 50020)* - - - -
N F Flameproof - Aluminium ATEX (EN 50018)*     STEP 2
P V Encapsulated ATEX + IECEx (EN/IEC 60079 / 61241)* - - -  Select prefix (combination). Refer to
S C Solenoid with spade plug connector (EN 60730) -    the specifications table on page 1 and
W P Waterproof IP67 - Metal enclosure (EN 60730) -    the prefix table on page 2, respect the
W P D U Dustproof ATEX (EN 50281-1-1) - Metal enclosure* -   
W P I S I.S. with Metal IP67 enclosure ATEX (EN 50020)* - - - - indicated power level.
W P Z N Non Sparking metal enclosure ATEX (EN 50021)* -    Example: NF
W S Waterproof IP67 - 316 SS enclosure -   
W S D U Dustproof ATEX (EN 50281-1-1) - 316 SS enclosure* -    STEP 3
W S E M 316 SS "EM" encl. ATEX + IECEx (EN/IEC 60079/61241)* -    Select suffix (combination) if required.
W S I S I.S. with 316 SS IP67 enclosure ATEX (EN 50020)* - - - - Refer to the suffix table on page 2,
W S N F Flameproof - 316 SS ATEX (EN 50018)*    
W S Z N Non Sparking 316 SS enclosure ATEX (EN 50021)* -   
respect the indicated power level.
T Threaded conduit (1/2" NPT) -    Example: MS
H C Class H - Battery charging circuit - - - 
H T Class H - High temperature - - - - STEP 4
Z N Encapsulated Non Sparking ATEX (EN 50021)* - - -  Select voltage. Refer to standard
X Other special constructions -    voltages on page 3.
SUFFIX TABLE Example: 230V / 50/60Hz
suffix description power level
STEP 5
1 2 3 4 5 LP RP MP BP
E EPDM (ethylene-propylene) - - - - Final catalogue / ordering number.
J CR (chloroprene) - - - - Example:
N Oxygen service (CR (chloroprene)) - - - - NF 8327B001 MS 230V / 50/60 Hz
N V FPM (fluoroelastomer) parts cleaned for oxygen service    
C O Epoxy coating on all external surfaces    
M B Mounting bracket - - - -
M O Manual operator    
M S Screw type manual operator (1)    
M Metering device - - - -
● Available feature
 Available feature in DC only
- Not available
* ATEX solenoids are also approved according to EN/IEC 61241 (Dust) and EN 13463-1 (non electrical valves)
(1)
Functional Safety certification is not applicable with this feature
ORDERING EXAMPLES VALVES:

SC 8 327B001 24V / DC
WSEMT G 327B002 MS 24V / DC
NFET G 327B001 230V / 50/60 Hz
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES WSEM G 327B002 MS 24V / DC
catalogue spare part kit no.(2) mounting NF 8 327B211 24V / DC
number ~/= bracket WS G 327B001 MS 24V / DC
SC 327B001 C123670  EM 8 327B201 230V / 50/60 Hz
SC 327B002 C123670  PV 8 327B012 MS 24V / DC
SC 327B011 C131237  EF G 327H002 MS 240V / 50/60 Hz
SC 327B012 C131237 
prefix (3) voltage
SC 327B101 C132251 
pipe thread suffix
SC 327B102 C132251  basic number (3)
SC 327B111 C132253 
SC 327B112 C132253 
SC 327B201 C132251  ORDERING EXAMPLES KITS:
SC 327B202 C132251 
SC 327B211 C132253  C131237 (4)
WSEM C123670 MS
SC 327B212 C132253 
NF C131237
SC 327B301 C133441 
WSEM C123670 MO
SC 327B302 C133441 
SC 327B311 C133442  prefix suffix
SC 327B312 C133442  basic number
 Select 8 for NPT ANSI 1.20.3 or select G for ISO G(228/1)
Standard prefixes/suffixes are also applicable to kits
(2) (3)
Prefix EF and EV should always be used in conjunction with
2008/R01
 Mounting holes in body change letter H in the basic number

(4)
Basic kit number applies to SC coil construction
2-50-2
SERIES 327
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Coil insulation materials H
Connector Spade plug
Connector specification ISO 4400 (cable Ø 6-10 mm)
Electrical safety IEC 335
Standard voltages: DC (=) 24V - 48V

AC (~) 24V - 48V - 115V - 230V/50/60Hz; Other voltages are available on request
power ratings operator replacement coil / kit
ambient electrical
prefix inrush holding hot/cold enclosure
temperature safety code type(2)
option ~ ~ = range (TS) protection ~ =
(EN 60529)
(VA) (VA) (W) (W) (°C)(1) 230V/50/60 Hz 24V/DC
Basic Power (BP)
SC 10,0 10,0 10,0 9,0/11,2 -40 to +55 EN 60730 moulded IP65 123664-017 400425-142 01
WP/WS 10,0 10,0 10,0 9,0/11,2 -40 to +55 EN 60730 steel/SS IP67 400915-017 400913-142 03
(WS)NF 10,0 10,0 10,0 9,0/11,2 -60 to +40/60 II 2 G/D EEx d IIC T6/T5 alu/SS IP67 400915-017 400913-142 05
EM/WSEM 10,0 10,0 10,0 9,0/11,2 -40 to +40 II 2 G/D EEx em II T3 steel/SS IP67 400915-017 400913-142 03
PV - - - 9,0/11,2 -40 to +65 II 2 G/D Ex mb II T4 / Ex mD moulded IP67 - - (4) 06
EF/EV 10,0 10,0 10,0 9,0/11,2 -40 to +55 NEMA type 7 and 9 mould. NEMA 4X - 238714-006D 07
ZN - - - 9,0/11,2 -20 to +50 II 3 G/D EEx nA II T3 moulded IP65 - - (4) 01
WP(WS)ZN - - - 9,0/11,2 -40 to +60/75 II 3 G/D EEx nA II T4/T3 steel/SS IP67 400915-017 400913-142 03
Medium Power (MP)
SC 5,8 5,8 5,8 5,2/5,7 -40 to +90 EN 60730 moulded IP65 400924-297 400923-442 02
WP/WS 5,8 5,8 5,8 5,2/5,7 -40 to +90 EN 60730 steel/SS IP67 400921-297 400914-442 04
(WS)NF 5,8 5,8 5,8 5,2/5,7 -60 to +60/75/90 II 2 G/D EEx d IIC T6/T5/T4 alu/SS IP67 400921-297 400914-442 05
EM/WSEM 5,8 5,8 5,8 5,2/5,7 -40 to +40/75/90 II 2 G/D EEx em II T5/T4/T3 steel/SS IP67 400921-297 400914-442 04
WP(WS)ZN 5,8 5,8 5,8 5,2/5,7 -40 to +40/60/90 II 3 G/D EEx nA II T6/T5/T4 steel/SS IP67 400921-297 400914-442 04
Reduced Power (RP)(3)
SC 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,2/3,6 -40 to +55 EN 60730 moulded IP65 400924-098(3) 400923-042 02
WP/WS 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,2/3,6 -40 to +55 EN 60730 steel/SS IP67 400921-098(3) 400914-242 04
(WS)NF 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,2/3,6 -60 to +60 II 2 G/D EEx d IIC T6 alu/SS IP67 400921-098(3) 400914-242 05
EM/WSEM 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,2/3,6 -40 to +40/55 II 2 G/D EEx em II T6/T5 steel/SS IP67 400921-098(3) 400914-242 04
WP(WS)ZN 3,7 3,7 3,7 - -40 to +40/55 II 3 G/D EEx nA II T6/T5 steel/SS IP67 400921-098(3) - 04
WP(WS)ZN - - - 3,2/3,6 -40 to +40/55 II 3 G/D EEx nA II T6/T5 steel/SS IP67 - 400914-242 04
Low Power (LP)(3)
(WS)NF 1,8 1,8 1,8 1,5/1,8 -40 to +60 II 2 G/D EEx d IIC T6 alu/SS IP67 - (3) 400914-542 05
(1)
Temperature range can be limited by sealings (3)
AC (~) limited to 120V/50/60Hz - Not available
(2)
Refer to the dimensional drawings on page 4 and 5 (4)
Multiple coil kits are available under ATEX, contact us
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS
● Ex mb/mD (prefix "PV") solenoid can be supplied with various cable lengths
● Compliance with "UL", "CSA" and other local approvals available on request
INSTALLATION
● Multi language installation/maintenance instructions are included with each valve
● The solenoid valves can be mounted in any position without affecting operation
● The mounting holes are provided in the valve body
● Threaded pipe connection identifier is 8 = NPT (ANSI 1.20.3); G = G (ISO 228/1)
● Declarations of conformity are available on request
● EEx em (prefix "EM") execution: solenoid enclosure has a cable gland with integral strain relief for cables with an o.d.
from 7 to 12 mm and is provided with an internal and external connection facility for an earthing or bonding conductor
● EEx d (prefix "(WS)NF") enclosure is provided with a 1/2" NPT threaded entry hole, M20 x 1,5 (prefix "ET") is optional.
Both are supplied without cable gland
● All DC solenoids with metal enclosure are provided with switch-off peak voltage suppression diodes
● To comply with IEC 61508 (SIL) the valves must be provided with a specific exhaust protector (as shown on page 5) or equal
2008/R01
2-50-3
SERIES 327
DIMENSIONS (mm), WEIGHT (kg)
TYPE 01: TYPE 02:
Prefix "SC" and "ZN" Solenoid Prefix "SC" Solenoid
Basic power Reduced and medium power
Epoxy moulded Epoxy moulded
IEC 335 / ISO 4400 (SC) IEC 335 / ISO 4400
EN 50021 (ZN) IP65
IP65 / II 3 G/D EEx nA II
327B001 / B002 / B011 / B012 327B101 / B102 / B111 / B112 / B201 / B202 / B211 / B212
� � Manual operator � � Manual operator
� (MS) execution � (MS) execution
� �
� �
360°
360°
� �
� �
�
� �
� �
��
�
�
��
� �
��
� ��
��
� ��
��
��
�
��
� �
�
TYPE 03: TYPE 04:

Prefix "WP", "WS", "(WS)EM" and "WP(WS)ZN" Solenoid Prefix "WP", "WS", "(WS)EM" and "WP(WS)ZN" Solenoid
Basic power Medium and reduced power
Steel; epoxy coated (EM, WP and WPZN) Steel; epoxy coated (EM, WP and WPZN)
AISI 316 SS (WS, WSEM and WSZN) AISI 316 SS (WS, WSEM and WSZN)
IEC 335 / EN 50019, EN 50028 and 50281-1-1 IEC 335 / EN 50019, EN 50028 and 50281-1-1
IP67 / II 2 G/D EEx em II / II 3 G/D EEx nA II IP67 / II 2 G/D EEx em II / II 3 G/D EEx nA II
327B001 / B002 / B011 / B012 327B101 / B102 / B111 / B112 / B201 / B202 / B211 / B212
� � � � Manual operator
Manual operator
360°
360°
� �
� �
� �
� � �
�
��
��
� ��
�
� ��
�
��
��
� �
� �
TYPE 05: TYPE 06:

Prefix "NF" and "WSNF" Solenoid Prefix "PV" Solenoid
Basic, medium, reduced and low power Basic power
Aluminium; epoxy coated (NF) Epoxy encapsulated
AISI 316 SS (WSNF) EN 50028 and EN 50281-1-1
EN 50018 and EN 50281-1-1 II 2 G/D Ex mb II / Ex mD
IP67 / II 2 G/D EEx d IIC IP67
327 B001 / B002 / B011 / B012 / B101 / B102 / B111 / B112 / 327B001 / B002 / B011 / B012
B201 / B202 / B211 / B212 / B301 / B302 / B311 / B312
� � Manual operator � � Manual operator
��
�
360° 360°
��
�
� � �
� � ��
� � ��
� �
� � �
� �
��
��
� ��
� ��
��
��
2008/R01
� �
�
2-50-4
SERIES 327
DIMENSIONS (mm), WEIGHT (kg)
TYPE 07:
Prefix "EF" and "EV" Solenoid
Basic power
Epoxy encapsulated
ICS-6 ANSI / NEMA
Type 7 and 9
NOTE: applicable to solenoid only
327H001 / H002 / H011 / H012
� �
�
360°
�
�
� ��
��
��
��
� ��
�
�
type prefix/option power A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R weight

level
01 SC, ZN BP 45 30 11 24 90 114 91 85 50 30 55 29 23 167 - 0,95 kg
02 SC MP/RP 50 30 11 24 109 95 87 56 53 55 29 23 162 - - 1,05 kg
03 WP, WS, (WS)EM, WP(WS)ZN BP 77 30 11 24 109 120 81 55 29 23 162 - - - - 1,00 kg
04 WP, WS, (WS)EM, WP(WS)ZN MP/RP 77 30 11 24 112 120 81 55 29 23 165 - - - - 1,00 kg
05 NF, WSNF BP/MP/RP 97 30 11 24 87 136 102 54 55 29 23 189 - - 73 2,60 kg
05 NF, WSNF LP 97 30 11 24 97 146 102 54 55 29 23 199 - - 83 2,65 kg
06 PV BP 45 30 11 24 76 97 72 67 45 55 29 23 150 - - 1,05 kg
07 EF, EV BP 50 30 24 87 98 77 51 55 29 23 151 - - - - 0,95 kg
SECTIONAL DRAWING
1
EXHAUST PROTECTOR
2
EXHAUST PROTECTOR ORDER NUMBERS

ISO 228/1 B-MV110014
brass/nickel
NPT B-PV110014
¼
ISO 22/1 B-VX110014
Execution : Manual Operator (MS) Execution : Manual Operator (MO) stainless steel
NPT B-PV110014 Inox
2008/R01
2-50-5
2-50-6
SERIES 327
PIC-02-0050-GB -- Availability, design and specifications are subject to change without notice. All rights reserved.
2008/R01
BACK TO SECTION INDEX
A QUALITY CONNECTION
AISI 316 3/8"- 1/2"NPT Instrument Filter Regulator

Filtro Regolatore per aria strumenti 3/8"- 1/2"NPT in AISI 316
! Suitable to instrumentation equipment
to onshore, offshore, pharmaceutical,
medical and dairy applications
! Excellent stability and repeatability
! Accurate adjustment and high flow
capacity
! Low droop at high flows
! Low cost
! Adatto per strumentazione in applicazioni
marine, petrolchimiche, farmaceutiche,
medicali e alimentari
! Eccellente stabilità e ripetibilità
! Precise regolazioni ed elevate portate
! Basse perdite di carico ad elevati flussi
! Basso costo
Ordering information
Informazioni per l’ordine
Media Compressed air, inert gases,
Fluido sweet and sour gases
Port thread FR 04 2 1 1/2
Connessioni 3/8"-1/2“ NPT
Gauge Connection
Connessione manometro 1/8” NPT
Type Accessories
Filtering Element FR= Filter Regulator 0= None
25 micron std F= Filter 1*= Pressure gauge
Elemento filtrante
R= Regulator 1S= AISI 316
Max Inlet Pressure 1B= AISI 304 case
Pressione massima di ingresso 20 bar 1C= C.S. painted case
Size 1A= ABS
Drain Valve 2= Bracket kit
Manual 04= 1/4" NPT
Scarico condensa 3= Panel mounting
06= 3/8” NPT
Flow Rate (@7bar supply 08= ½” NPT 4= Customized tag
15 dm3 /s 5= No relieving
Output pressure of 1,4bar)
6= Gauge port ¼”
Portata Range 7= Automatic drain
Working Temperature 0= None Filter element
Temperatura di esercizio -25°C up to 80°C* 1= 0,2-2 bar 0= None
2= 0,4-4 bar 1= 5 micron (STD)
Minimum Output Pressure 10% of the operating 3= 0,4-8 bar 2= 25 micron Special
Pressione minima in Uscita pressure 3= 40 micron Special
*Special version available for – 45°C to 80°C
ATEX 94/9/CE II2GD c IICT6 X
Permette precise regolazioni per una vasta gamma di
It provides excellent regulation for a wide range of
applicazioni
applications
Robusto e resistente alla corrosione - Costruito in Acciaio
Rugged and corrosion-resistant - made of die-cast
lnox 316 pressofuso
316 Stainless Steel- no brass parts are used
Imballaggio poco ingombrante - Leggero in peso
Compact small package size - Light Weight
Montaggio staffa Inox, interasse viti variabile da 15 a
Mounting : Stainless Steel bracket, adjustable
57mm
screw centres 15 to 57mm
Pos Material Materiale

5,7,12, Body, bonnet, bowl, and internals Stainless steel AISI Corpo, coperchio, tazza e particolari interni in acciaio inossidabile
14,21,22, 24 316 to NACE MR-0175 AISI 316 secondo NACE MR-0175
1,2,3,4,25 Adjustment screw, bracket, lock and panel nuts, fixing Vite d regolazione, staffa, dadi di bloccaggio e pannello, viti di
screws AISI 316 Stainlesssteel fissaggio in acciaio inossidabile AISI 316
8,9,10, Diaphragm and valve assembly Assieme diaframma e assieme valvola in fluoroelastomero e in
11,16,17 Fluoroelastomer and AISI 316 Stainless steel acciaio inossidabile AISI 316
19,20 Filter element AISI 316 Stainless steel or polypropylene Elemento filtrante in acciaio inossidabile AISI 316 o polipropilene
6,18 Valve spring ,Adjustment spring AISI 316 Stainless Molle valvola e di regolazione in acciaio inossidabile AISI 316
steel
13,15, 23 Seals Fluoroelastomer Guarnizioni in fluoroelastomero
Sitecna sas
Via Liguria 2/28 www.sitecna .net
20068 Peschiera Borromeo
Milano - Italy
Tel. +39025475482 Fax +39025530713
BACK TO SECTION INDEX
®
A QUALITY CONNECTION
Dimension
Dimensioni
Flow Characteristics
Caratteristiche di portata
PORT SIZE: 3/8"
bar
psi
ELEMENT: 25 µm
INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar
RANGE: 0,4 to 8 bar
100
OUTLET PRESSURE
6
80
60 4
40
2
20
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s
0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm

AIR FLOW
PORT SIZE: 1/2", ELEMENT: 25 µm

psi
bar
INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar

RANGE: 0.4 to 8 bar)
100
Panel mounting hole diameter: 13 mm
OUTLET PRESSURE
Foro montaggio pannello :

6
80
4 60
40
2
20
0 0
0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm
dm3/s
Accessories and repair kit 0 20 40 60
AIR FLOW
80 100
Accessori e ricambi
Maintenance kit Item 8,9,10,11,16,17,18,19,20

Kit manutenzione FR-06-K-X(3/8"-1/2")
Pressure gauge 0-2 bar MBSSP4S2PG04
Manometro 0-4 bar MBSSP4S2PG05
0-10 bar MBSSP4S2PG07
Bracket and lock nut
FR-04-ST
Staffa e dado
Sitecna sas
Via Liguria 2/28 www.sitecna .net
20068 Peschiera Borromeo
Milano - Italy
Tel. +39025475482 Fax +39025530713
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
June 2007 2625 and 2625NS Volume Boosters
Type 2625 and 2625NS Volume Boosters

Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Educational Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Pressure Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Diagnostic Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Supply Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Exhaust Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operating Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Principle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Diaphragm Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . 7
Valve Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation of Diagnostic Connections . . . . . . . 9 W4727/IL
Parts Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Figure 1. Type 2625 Volume Booster
Description
Introduction The Type 2625 and 2625NS volume boosters are
used in conjunction with a positioner on a throttling
Scope of Manual control valve to increase stroking speed. The
booster has a fixed deadband (controlled by the
This instruction manual provides installation, seat-to-seat dimension of the supply and exhaust
operation, maintenance, and parts information for plugs) which is factory set during assembly and
Type 2625 and 2625NS volume boosters (figure 1). testing. In addition, the booster incorporates
Refer to separate instruction manuals for information soft-seat construction and an integral bypass
regarding the valve body, actuator, and other restriction to eliminate positioner saturation problems
accessories. that can occur with volume boosters that do not have
these features. Adjustment of the integral bypass
Do not install, operate, or maintain a Type 2625 or restriction is necessary for system stability. This
2625NS volume booster without first D being fully adjustment does not affect the deadband of the
trained and qualified in valve, actuator and booster, but does permit the control valve to respond
accessory installation, operation and maintenance, to small input signal changes from the positioner
and D carefully reading and understanding the without sacrificing steady-state accuracy.
contents of this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these instructions, contact your Emerson It also allows the booster to deliver high-volume
Process Managementt sales office before output for fast stroking when large, rapid input signal
proceeding. changes occur.
D100348X012
www.Fisher.com
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
2625 and 2625NS Volume Boosters June 2007
Table 1. Specifications
Port Diameters(1) 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) exhaust port: 3.5%

Supply Port: J 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) or J 12.7 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) exhaust port: 5%
mm (0.5 inch)
Exhaust Port: J 2.4 mm (0.094 inch), J 9.5 mm Operative Temperature Limits(2,3)
(0.375 inch) or J 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) Type 2625: −40 to 71_C (−40 to 160_F)
Type 2625NS: −40 to 93_C (−40 to 200_F)
Input Signal
Maximum Flow Coefficients
Positioner output
See table 2
Maximum Input Signal Pressure
Connections
10.3 bar (150 psig)
Input Signal: 1/4 NPT
Supply and Output Signal: 3/4 NPT
Input to Output Pressure Ratio
Fixed at 1 to 1 Hazardous Area Classification
Complies with the requirements of ATEX Group II
Supply Pressure Ranges(2) Category 2 Gas and Dust
When used in conjunction with a positioner or
other pneumatic accessory, always pipe the
positioner and booster with one common supply
through a Type 64 or 95H regulator (see figure 4). Approximate Weight
A high-capacity filter, such as the Type 262K, Aluminum Body: 2.3 kg (5 pounds)
should be installed in the supply line to the Brass Body: 5.0 kg (11 pounds)
regulator. Supply pressure also must not exceed
the maximum pressure rating of the actuator. Declaration of SEP
Constructions are available in two maximum
supply ranges. Fisher Controls International LLC declares this
product to be in compliance with Article 3
When Normally Used With Diaphragm paragraph 3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive
Actuators: Up to 2.8 bar (40 psig) (PED) 97 / 23 / EC. It was designed and
When Normally Used With Piston Actuators: manufactured in accordance with Sound
Up to 10.3 bar (150 psig) Engineering Practice (SEP) and cannot bear the
CE marking related to PED compliance.
Nominal Deadband(3) However, the product may bear the CE marking
Percent of Positioner Output Span(4): to indicate compliance with other applicable EC
2.4 mm (0.094 inch) exhaust port: 2% Directives.
1. May be used in any combination.
2. The pressure/temperature limits in this document, and any applicable code or standard limitation should not be exceeded.
3. This term defined in ISA Standard S51.1
4. Zero psig to maximum supply.
The volume booster, when used in conjunction with

a positioner/actuator, is used only to improve
stroking speed. It is not recommended for other
applications requiring a high-accuracy,
instrument-type volume booster. If you use the
volume booster only with an actuator, for on-off
1V4059-J SHT 1 / DOC
control, the integral bypass restriction on the volume Figure 2. Example Nameplate
booster must be closed (turned fully clockwise).
The Type 2625NS volume booster is designed for
nuclear power applications. The Type 2625NS
To facilitate diagnostic testing, you can install construction includes materials that provide superior
connectors and piping with each Type 2625 and performance at elevated temperature and radiation
2625NS volume booster. levels.
2
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
Table 2. Maximum Flow Coefficients Educational Services
PORT SIZE COMBINATIONS SUPPLY PORT EXHAUST PORT For information on available courses for Type 2625
COEFFICIENTS COEFFICIENTS
Supply Port Exhaust Port
and 2625NS volume boosters, as well as a variety of
mm Inch mm Inch Cv Cv
other products, contact:
2.4 0.094 3.74 0.23
9.5 0.375 9.5 0.375 3.74 2.29 Emerson Process Management
12.7 0.5 3.74 2.52
Educational Services, Registration
2.4 0.094 4.98 0.24
12.7 0.5 9.5 0.375 4.98 2.30
P.O. Box 190; 301 S. 1st Ave.
12.7 0.5 4.98 2.72 Marshalltown, IA 50158−2823
Type 3570 Valve Positioner 0.25 0.25 Phone: 800−338−8158 or
Type 3582 Valve Positioner 0.17 0.19 Phone: 641−754−3771
Type 3610J, 3610JP, 3611JP, FAX: 641−754−3431
0.37 0.30
3620J, 3620JP, 3621JP e-mail: education@emersonprocess.com
Type DVC5000, DVC5000f 0.24 0.27
Type DVC6000, DVC6000f 0.37 0.31
Note
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process

The O-rings in the Type 2625NS are EPDM Management, nor any of their affiliated
(ethylene propylene) and the diaphragms are entities assumes responsibility for the
EPDM/meta-aramid. EPDM demonstrates superior selection, use, and maintenance of any
temperature capability and shelf life over nitrile. The product. Responsibility for the
meta-aramid diaphragm fabric demonstrates selection, use, and maintenance of any
improved strength retention at elevated temperature product remains with the purchaser
and radiation conditions. and end-user.
CAUTION Installation
Use a clean, dry, oil-free air supply WARNING

with instruments containing EPDM
components. EPDM is subject to Always wear protective clothing,
degradation when exposed to gloves, and eyewear when performing
petroleum based lubricants. any maintenance procedures to avoid
personal injury.
Under the 10CFR50, Appendix B, quality assurance System damage may result if a volume
program, the 2625NS volume booster is qualified booster is installed in a way that it can
“commercial grade dedicated”. These can be be physically damaged.
supplied as 10CFR, Part 21 items.
Personal injury or system damage may
result when service conditions exceed
booster or other equipment ratings.
Exceeding the pressure specifications
in table 1 may cause leakage, parts
damage, or personal injury due to
Specifications bursting of pressure-containing parts
or explosion of accumulated gas.
Specifications for the Type 2625 and 2625NS Check with your process or safety
volume booster are listed in table 1. Information for engineer for any additional measures
an individual unit as it comes from the factory that must be taken to protect against
appears on the nameplate (figure 2). process media.
3
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
INPUT SIGNAL
BYPASS
RESTRICTION
ADJUSTING
DIAPHRAGMS SCREW
(KEY 5 AND 6)
EXHAUST BYPASS
PORT RESTRICTION
(KEY 11)
EXHAUST
SUPPLY
PORT
SUPPLY OUTPUT TO
ACTUATOR
W0679-1/IL
Figure 3. Volume Booster Sectional View
Note 262K, should be installed in the supply line to the

Type 64 or 95H regulator.
Do not use separate pressure supplies
for the volume booster and associated
positioner. Mounting
The volume booster may not exhaust The volume booster is typically nipple-mounted
between the pneumatic supply source and the
immediately upon loss of a separate
pressure supply. However, if the actuator, and may be used with piston or diaphragm
actuators. Many actuators require larger casing or
system is in a transient state at the
time of pressure supply loss or if cylinder connections and modifications to allow the
booster to deliver the higher volume output.
changes to the booster’s input signal
are sufficient to overcome the The booster may also be directly mounted to the
deadband, the booster will exhaust.
actuator by using an actuator yoke mounting bracket
A loss of a pressure supply (either (see figure 6) or casing mounting bracket.
separate or common) to a Type 3582 or
3610J positioner will cause the
positioner’s output pressure Pressure Connections
(booster’s input pressure) to decay. The input signal connection is 1/4 NPT. The supply
and output connections are 3/4 NPT (minimum pipe
Always pipe the positioner and the volume booster size recommended for nipple mounting is 1/2 NPT).
with one common supply. See figure 4 for typical Connections to the volume booster should be made
installation examples. A Type 64 or 95H regulator is as indicated in figure 3. Connections for two typical
required to provide sufficient capacity to supply both applications are shown in figure 4. Ensure that the
components. A high-capacity filter, such as the Type piping is of proper size to meet the capacity
4
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
demands of the booster and that you equip the Exhaust Ports
actuator with properly sized input connections.
Exhaust to the atmosphere is through exhaust ports
in the side of the unit. Keep the exhaust ports free of
any obstructions or foreign materials that might clog
them.
Diagnostic Connections
To support diagnostic testing of
valve/actuator/positioner packages, install
connectors and hardware between the Type 2625 or Operating Information
2625NS volume booster and the actuator. Typical
The only operating requirement of the volume
connector installations are shown in figure 4.
booster is the adjustment of the bypass restriction
for stable actuator performance. Although systems
The hardware used includes a 3/4 NPT pipe nipple, with different characteristics may require different
pipe tee, and pipe bushings with an 1/8 NPT pipe adjusting techniques, the following adjustment
bushing for the connector. The connector consists of procedure is recommended when using the actuator
an 1/8 NPT body and body protector. for throttling control.
See separate instructions for diagnostic connections Note

to the positioner.
When sizing the booster, select the
lowest Cg that will meet the stroking
speed specifications. Oversizing the
Supply Pressure booster in a closed loop may lead to
Supply pressure must be clean dry air or stability problems, thus requiring the
noncorrosive gas, and it should be filtered. bypass to be opened so far that the
booster will never operate.
Prior to operation, turn the bypass restriction
adjusting screw (figure 3) four or five turns
CAUTION counterclockwise from the fully closed position. With
the actuator in operation, slowly turn the restriction
Use a clean, dry, oil-free air supply clockwise until the booster operates in response to
with instruments containing EPDM large changes in the input signal, yet allows small
components. EPDM is subject to changes to move the actuator without initiating
degradation when exposed to booster operation.
petroleum based lubricants.
If the actuator is to be used for on-off control, the
restriction should be closed (turned fully clockwise).
WARNING
If a flammable or hazardous gas is to Principle of Operation

be used as the supply pressure
medium, personal injury, property Refer to figures 3 and 4.
damage or equipment damage could
result from fire or explosion of Because of the restriction, large input signal
accumulated gas or from contact with changes register on the booster input diaphragm
hazardous gas. The volume booster sooner than in the actuator. A large, sudden change
has no provision for piping away the in the input signal causes a pressure differential to
vented exhaust gas. Therefore, do not exist between the input signal and the output of the
use flammable or otherwise hazardous booster. When this occurs, the diaphragms move to
gas as a supply medium unless the open either the supply port or the exhaust port,
unit is in a well-ventilated area and all whichever action is required to reduce the pressure
ignition sources have been removed. differential. The port remains open until the
5
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
POSITIONER OUTPUT OPTIONAL

(TOP CYL) DIAGNOSTIC
POSITIONER CONNECTION
TYPE 2625 OR 2625NS
VOLUME BOOSTER
INPUT SIGNAL
SUPPLY
PIPE NIPPLE
TYPE
64 OR 95H
PIPE TEE
PIPE BUSHING
BODY
BODY PROTECTOR TYPE 2625 OR 2625NS
VOLUME BOOSTER
ACTUATOR
POSITIONER OUTPUT
WITH A PISTON ACTUATOR (BOTTOM CYL)
TYPE 2625 OR 2625NS

VOLUME BOOSTER
PIPE TEE
PIPE BUSHING
BODY
BODY PROTECTOR PIPE

NIPPLE
OPTIONAL
DIAGNOSTIC
CONNECTION POSITIONER
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
POSITIONER
SUPPLY
ACTUATOR TYPE
64 OR 95H
B2372-1 / IL
WITH A DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOR
Figure 4. Typical Installations
difference between the booster input and output Maintenance

pressures returns to within the deadband limits of
the booster. With the bypass restriction adjusted for
stable operation, signals having small magnitude WARNING
and rate changes pass through the bypass
restriction and into the actuator without initiating
booster operation. Both the supply and exhaust Always wear protective clothing,
ports remain closed, preventing unnecessary air gloves, and eyewear when performing
consumption and possible saturation of positioner any maintenance procedures to avoid
relays. personal injury.
6
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
Maintenance requires taking the with one of a different maximum
volume booster out of service allowable supply pressure, make sure
periodically. To avoid personal injury that both springs are identically rated.
or equipment damage, disconnect or
bypass any pressure lines to the
booster, and vent any pressure locked
in the unit before you begin CAUTION
maintenance.
Check with your process or safety To avoid damage to the diaphragms,
engineer for any additional measures do not overtighten the screws.
that must be taken to protect against
process media. 5. Replace the six cap screws (key 15) and tighten
them in a crisscross manner.
Diaphragm Assembly Replacement

Key numbers refer to figure 5. Valve Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the six cap screws (key 15) from the
perimeter of the spring case assembly (key 3), and CAUTION
lift off the assembly, taking care you do not lose the
input spring (key 8) or the spring seat (key 9).
The distance between the exhaust port
2. Remove the upper diaphragm (key 6), diaphragm seat line on the upper valve (key 7C)
spacer (key 2), diaphragm assembly (key 5), (which and the supply port seat line on the
includes the lower diaphragm), and the O-rings (key lower valve and stem (key 7B) is
14). Inspect these parts for damage and replace if critical to ensure the deadband
necessary. requirements of the volume booster.
3. Replace the O-rings (key 14) after coating with This distance must be adjusted in
lubricant (key 21). Then replace the diaphragm accordance with the following steps
assembly (key 5), diaphragm spacer (key 2), and the before you replace the valve assembly
upper diaphragm (key 6). (key 7), or the upper valve (key 7C),
and lower valve and stem (key 7B).
Note For key numbers refer to figure 5.

To ensure proper operation of the 1. Remove the six cap screws (key 15) from the
bypass restriction, make certain that perimeter of the spring case assembly (key 3) and
the holes in the diaphragm and the lift off the assembly, taking care you do not lose the
bypass restriction are in line with the upper spring (key 8) or the spring seat (key 9).
holes in the diaphragm spacer (key 2).
4. Install the spring case assembly (key 3) on the 2. Remove the upper diaphragm (key 6), the
upper diaphragm (key 6). Make sure the spring seat diaphragm spacer (key 2), the diaphragm assembly
(key 9) and the upper spring (key 8) are installed in (key 5), (which includes the lower diaphragm), and
the spring case assembly (key 3). Press on the the O-rings (key 14).
bottom of the spring seat with your finger. If the 3. Unscrew the valve assembly (key 7) from the
spring seat (key 9) does not move freely in the body. The seat ring (key 7A) has a 1-1/2 inch hex for
spring case assembly (key 3), remove the spring removal.
seat (key 9), and apply lubricant (key 23). Reinstall
the spring seat (key 9) in the spring case assembly 4. If you are replacing a complete valve assembly
(key 3). (key 7), proceed to step 8.
5. If you are replacing an upper valve (key 7C) and
Note a lower valve and stem (key 7B), loosen the hex nut
(key 7E), and remove the upper valve. Remove the
When replacing either the upper spring hex nut, and remove the lower valve and stem from
(key 8) or the lower spring (key 10) the seat ring (key 7A).
7
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
DV4286-B / DOC
Figure 5. Volume Booster Assembly Drawing
6. Insert the replacement lower valve and stem (key diaphragm spacer (key 2). If not, loosen the hex nut
7B) into the seat ring (key 7A) and install the hex nut (key 7E) and raise or lower the upper valve (key 7C)
(key 7E) on the stem. accordingly. Remove the valve assembly (key 7) to
loosen the hex nut (key 7E).
7. Apply sealant (key 22) to the threads of the lower
valve and stem (key 7B) and install the upper valve 13. Repeat steps 9 through 12 until the upper
(key 7C). Tighten the hex nut (key 7E). surface of the diaphragm assembly (key 5) coincides
with the upper surface of the diaphragm spacer
8. Apply lubricant (key 21) to the O-ring (key 7D), (key 2).
lubricant (key 23) to the lower valve and stem (key
7B), and sealant (key 20) to the thread of the seat
ring (key 7A). Note
9. Install the valve assembly (key 7) into the body To ensure proper operation of the
(key 1)—making sure the lower valve and stem (key bypass restriction, make certain that
7B) engages over the lower spring (key 10)—and the holes in the diaphragm and the
into the bottom plug (key 4). bypass restriction are in line with the
10. Install the diaphragm assembly (key 5) onto the holes in the diaphragm spacer (key 2).
upper valve (key 7C). 14. Make sure the O-rings (key 14) are installed in
11. Install the diaphragm spacer (key 2) onto the the diaphragm spacer (key 2) and coated with
body (key 1). lubricant (key 21).
12. Place a straight edge at least 5 inches (127 mm) 15. Install the upper diaphragm (key 6).
long across the diaphragm spacer (key 2). The 16. Install the spring case assembly (key 3) on the
upper surface of the diaphragm assembly (key 5) upper diaphragm (key 6). Make sure the spring seat
should coincide with the upper surface of the (key 9) and upper spring (key 8) are installed in the
8
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
spring case assembly. Press on the bottom of the could give rise to personal injury and
spring seat with your finger. If the spring seat does property damage.
not move freely in the spring case assembly, remove
the spring seat, apply lubricant (key 23), and reinstall
in the spring case assembly. Note
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process
Management, nor any of their affiliated
CAUTION entities assumes responsibility for the
selection, use, and maintenance of any
To avoid damage to the diaphragms, product. Responsibility for the
do not overtighten the screws. selection, use, and maintenance of any
product remains with the purchaser
17. Replace the six cap screws (key 15) and tighten and end-user.
them in a crisscross manner.
Installation of Diagnostic Connections

Parts List (figure 5)
See figure 4 for part names and order of installation.
1. Before you assemble the pipe nipple, pipe tee, Note

pipe bushings, actuator piping, and connector body, Part numbers are shown for recommended spares
apply sealant to all threads. only. For part numbers not shown, contact your
Emerson Process Management sales office.
2. Turn the pipe tee to position the connector body
and body protector for easy access when doing Key Description Part Number
1 Body
diagnostic testing.
Aluminum (must be used
w/Type 1069 actuator)
Brass
2 Diaphragm Spacer
Aluminum (must be used
w/Type 1069 actuator)
Parts Ordering Aluminum with 1/2 NPT vent connection
Brass
Whenever corresponding with your Emerson 3 Spring Case Assembly
Process Management sales office about this Aluminum/heat-treated 440 stainless steel
(must be used w/Type 1069 actuator)
equipment, mention the serial number of the volume Brass
booster. This serial number can be found on the 4 Body Cap
nameplate (figure 2 and key 16, figure 5). When Brass
ordering replacement parts, also state the complete Aluminum (must be used
eleven-digit part number of each part required as w/Type 1069 actuator)
found in the following parts list. 5* Diaphragm Assembly
For Type 2625
Nitrile on nylon
With blocked exhaust 1V4056000A2
With 2.4 mm (0.094 inch) exhaust 1V4054000A2
WARNING With 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) exhaust 1V4055000A2
With 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) exhaust 1V3624000A2
Brass
Use only genuine Fisher replacement With 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) exhaust 1V4055X00A2
parts. Components that are not Aluminum (must be used w/Type 1069 actuator)
supplied by Emerson Process With 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) exhaust 1V4055X0022
Management should not, under any With 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) exhaust 1V3624X0032
circumstances, be used in any Fisher Aluminum with 1/2 NPT vent connection
instrument. The use of components With 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) exhaust 12B5261X012
With 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) exhaust 12B5261X022
not manufactured by Emerson Process
For Type 2625NS
Management will void your warranty, EPDM/meta-aramid,
might adversely affect the With 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) exhaust 17B4810X0A2
performance of the instrument, and With 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) exhaust 17B4796X0A2
*Recommended spare parts 9

Instruction Manual
Form 5122
YOKE MOUNTING
BRACKET (KEY 26)
ATTACH THIS SURFACE
TO ACTUATOR YOKE
YOKE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
(KEY 26)
A6034-1 / IL
Figure 6. Volume Booster with Yoke Mounting Bracket
Key Description Part Number Key Description Part Number

6* Upper Diaphragm
For Type 2625, nitrile on nylon 2V197702052 10 Lower Spring, steel pl
For Type 2625NS, EPDM/meta-aramid 27B4799X012 For 2.8 bar (40 psig) max. supply pressure
7* Valve Assembly For 10.3 bar (150 psig) max. supply pressure
(includes keys 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E) 11 Restriction, 303 stainless steel
For Type 2625 12 Hex Nut, steel pl
Brass/nitrile 13* O-Ring
9.5 mm (0.375 inch) supply port 1V1998000A2 For Type 2625, nitrile 1C854606992
12.7 mm (0.5 inch) supply port 1V1997000A2 For Type 2625NS, EPDM 17B4800X012
Aluminum/nitrile (must be used 14* O-Ring (2 req’d)
w/Type 1069 actuator) For Type 2625, nitrile 1C853806992
9.5 mm (0.375 inch) supply port 1V1998X0022 For Type 2625NS, EPDM 17B4801X012
12.7 mm (0.5 inch) supply port 1V1997X0022 15 Cap Screw, steel pl (6 req’d)
For Type 2625NS Standard
9.5 mm (0.375 inch) supply port 17B4811X0A2 With 1/2 NPT vent connection 1F960324052
12.7 mm (0.5 inch) supply port 17B4802X0A2 16 Nameplate, stainless steel
7A* Seat Ring 17 Drive Screw, stainless steel (2 req’d) 1A368228982
Brass
9.5 mm (0.375 inch) supply port 2V197814012 18 Pipe Nipple
12.7 mm (0.5 inch) supply port 2V197914012 Steel/galvanized (maximum of 2 req’d)
Aluminum (must be used w/Type 1069 actuator) 1/2 NPT x 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inch) long
9.5 mm (0.375 inch) supply port 2V1978X0012 1/2 NPT x 76.2 mm (3-inch) long
12.7 mm (0.5 inch) supply port 2V1979X0012 1/2 NPT x 101.6 mm (4-inch) long
7B* Lower Valve and Stem 1/2 NPT x 177.8 mm (7-inch) long
For Type 2625 3/4 NPT x 50.8 mm (2-inch) long
Aluminum/nitrile/416 stainless steel 1V1981000A2 316 SST (maximum of 2 req’d)
For Type 2625NS 17B4803X012 1/2 NPT x 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inch) long
7C* Upper Valve 1/2 NPT x 76.2 mm (3-inch) long
For Type 2625, Aluminum/nitrile 1V198470972 1/2 NPT x 101.6 mm (4-inch) long
For Type 2625NS 17B4804X012 1/2 NPT x 177.8 mm (7-inch) long
7D* Valve O-Ring 3/4 NPT x 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inch) long
For Type 2625, nitrile 1P420606992 19 Pipe Bushing (maximum of 2 req’d)
For Type 2625NS, EPDM 17B4805X012 3/4 x 1/2 NPT, steel/galvanized
7E Hex Nut, steel pl 3/4 x 1/2 NPT, 316 SST
8 Upper Spring, steel pl 20 Anti-seize sealant
For 2.8 bar (40 psig) max. supply pressure (not furnished with the volume booster)
For 10.3 bar (150 psig) max. supply pressure 21 Lubricant, silicone sealant
9 Spring Seat, 303 stainless steel (not furnished with the volume booster)
10 *Recommended spare parts

Instruction Manual
Form 5122
Key Description Part Number Key Description Part Number
22 Thread locking adhesive, mild strength

(not furnished with the volume booster)
23 PTFE petroleum-based lubricant (not furnished with
the volume booster) (see note immediately below)
Note
Diagnostic Connections
PTFE petroleum-based lubricant is only for
use with Type 2625. For Type 2625NS use a
medium grade silicone-based lubricant. FlowScannert diagnostic system hook-up
Includes pipe tee, pipe nipple, pipe
24 Elbow, 1/2 NPT, 90 degree bushings, connector body, and body
Iron/galvanized protector.
25 Street elbow, 1/2 NPT, 90 degree
Iron/galvanized, plated For diaphragm actuator
316 SST SST fittings
26 Mounting Bracket Brass fittings
For yoke mounting (see figure 6) For piston actuator
For casing mounting SST fittings
(Use two brackets, stacked, for seismic mounting) Brass fittings
11
Instruction Manual
Form 5122
FlowScanner and Fisher are marks owned by Fisher Controls International LLC, a member of the Emerson Process Management business division
of Emerson Electric Co. Emerson Process Management, Emerson, and the Emerson logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric
Co. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are
not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability.
We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice.
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process Management, nor any of their affiliated entities assumes responsibility for the selection, use and
maintenance of any product. Responsibility for the selection, use and maintenance of any product remains with the purchaser and end-user.
Emerson Process Management
Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 USA
Cernay 68700 France
Sao Paulo 05424 Brazil
Singapore 128461
www.Fisher.com
12
EFisher Controls International LLC 1979, 2007; All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Poppet Valves
1/4" to 2" Air Pilot Actuated
2/2, 3/2, & 4/2 Inline and Subbase Valves
● High flow - Cv of 1.2 to 49.5
● Durable, robust construction
● Two mounting styles: inline or subbase
● 1/4" to 2" ports (BSPP, PTF, or ISO Rc threads)
● Wide range of Air Pilot Operators available
● Four functional types: available in 2/2, 3/2, 3/2
multi-directional and 4/2 configurations
Technical Data Ordering Information

To order standard poppet valves with air pilot
operators, quote model number from tables
Medium:
overleaf, i.e. order D1024C-00-A1 for a 3-port,
Filtered and lubricated or non-lubricated compressed air or vacuum. 2-position, normally closed, Air Pilot Operated
Operation: Spring Return model.
Poppet valve air pilot actuated. 2-Port/2-Position
Normally Closed Normally Open
OUT
Mounting:
OUT
B B
Through-holes in valve body and subbase. A A

IN IN
Port Size: 3-Port/2-Position

Normally Closed
1/4" to 2" PTF, BSPP, or ISO Rc. OUT Normally Open
OUT
Operating Pressure: EXH IN

EXH IN
300 psig (Maximum 20.7 bar). For details see overleaf. 3-Port/2-Position Multi-Directional
Distributor Selector
Flow Characteristics: OUT2 OUT1
B C
OUT
A
Basic Size Function Cv* l/min

B C
1/4" 3/2 & 4/2 1.2 - 1.8 984 - 2,435 A

IN
IN2 IN1
Normally Closed Normally Open

1/2" 2/2, 3/2 & 4/2 3.2 - 5.8 3,398 - 6,230 OUT
A
OUT
A
1" 2/2, 3/2 & 4/2 10.3 - 17.7 4,474 - 15,348

2" 2/2 & 3/2 39.6 - 49.5 38,228 - 54,085 C
EXH
B
IN
B
EXH
C
IN
*See VAL-12-58 for additional flow information.

4-Port/2-Position 4-Port/2-Position 3-Way
Operating Temperature: 4-Way Twin Normally Closed
CYL 1IN
-20°F to 175°F** (-29°C to 79°C) CYL2 CYL1
**Consult Technical Service for use below 35°F (+2°C).

Materials: IN EXH
Body: Aluminum alloy body, piston, poppets and subbase.

Operators: Zinc or aluminum air pilot operators. EXH CYL2
Elastomers: Nitrile rubber seals. (Fluorocarbon seals are This example shows a 3-way normally closed valve.
optional, contact Technical Services.)
EXH
OUT
IN
VAL-12-22 Littleton, CO USA Phone: 303-794-2611 www.norgren.com

Prospector Series Poppet Valves
Air Pilot Operated Spring Return Inline and Subbase Valves
Below listed operators are single air operators with spring returns.
2-Port/2-Position (2 way) Inline, Normally Closed
Symbol Basic Port Model Operating Pilot Weight Repair Kit§

Size Size Pressure Pressure lbs.(kg)
psig (bar) psig (bar)
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
1/4" A1012C-00-A1 53474-03
OUT
B
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
3/8" A1013C-00-A1 53474-03
A (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
IN
1/2"
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
1/2" A1014C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
3/4" A1015C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
0 - 300 30 -300 3.69
3/4" A1025C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.68)
1" 0 - 300 30 -300 3.69
1" A1026C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.68)
0 - 300 30 -300 3.69
1-1/4" A1027C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.68)
0 - 300 30 -300 8.05
1-1/2" A1038C-00-A1 53822-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (3.65)
2" 0 - 300 30 -300 8.05
2" A1039C-00-A1 53822-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (3.65)
2-Port/2-Position (2 way) Inline, Normally Open

0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
1/4" B1012C-00-A1 53474-03
OUT
B
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
3/8" B1013C-00-A1 53474-03
A (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
IN 1/2"
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
1/2" B1014C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
0 - 300 30 -300 1.51
3/4" B1015C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.69)
0 - 300 30 -300 3.69
3/4" B1025C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.68)
1" 0 - 300 30 -300 3.69
1" B1026C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.68)
0 - 300 30 -300 3.69
1-1/4" B1027C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.68)
§ Repair Kit: Kit contains all elastomers necessary to service one valve body.
Note: Pilot supply pressure must be equal to or greater than the operating pressure.
Littleton, CO USA Phone: 303-794-2611 www.norgren.com VAL-12-23

3-Port/2-Position (3 way) Inline, Normally Closed

0 - 300 30 - 300 1.20
1/4" D1012H-00-A1 53474-05
OUT (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.55)
1/4"
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.20
3/8" D1013H-00-A1 53474-05
EXH IN
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.55)
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
1/4" D1022C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
3/8" D1023C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
1/2"
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
1/2" D1024C-00-A1 53475-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
3/4" D1025C-00-A1 53475-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.78
3/4" D1035C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.72)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.78
1" 1" D1036C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.72)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.78
1-1/4" D1047C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.72)
3-Port/2-Position (3 way) Inline, Normally Open

0 - 300 30 - 300 1.20
1/4" E1012H-00-A1 53473-05
Normally Open
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.55)
OUT
1/4"
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.20
3/8" E1013H-00-A1 53473-05
EXH IN (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.55)
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
1/4" E1022C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
3/8" E1023C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
1/2"
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
1/2" E1024C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.79
3/4" E1025C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.81)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.78
3/4" E1035C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.72)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.78
1" 1" E1036C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.72)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.78
1-1/4" E1047C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.72)

3-Port/2-Position (3 way) Multi-Directional Inline

0 - 300 30 - 300 1.41
These models 1/4" C1012C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.64)
may be used as 0 - 300 30 - 300 1.41
3/8" C1013C-00-A1 53474-03
Distributor, (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.64)
1/2"
Selector, 0 - 300 30 - 300 1.41
1/2" C1014C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.64)
Normally Open
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.41
or Normally 3/4" C1025C-00-A1 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.64)
Closed. 0 - 300 30 - 300 3.94
3/4" C1035C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.79)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.94
1" 1" C1036C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.79)
0 - 300 30 - 300 3.94
1-1/4" C1037C-00-A1 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.79)
0 - 300 30 - 300 8.75
1-1/2" C1048C-00-A1 53822-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (3.97)
2"
0 - 300 30 - 300 8.75
2" C1049C-00-A1 53822-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (3.97)
4-Port/2-Position (3 way twin) Inline

0 - 300 30 - 300 2.25
3/8" G1023B-00-A4 53474-03
CYL 1IN
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.02)
0 - 300 30 - 300 2.25
1/2" 1/2" G1024B-00-A4 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.02)
0 - 300 30 - 300 2.25
3/4" G1025B-00-A4 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.02)
EXH CYL2 0 - 300 30 - 300 4.96
3/4" G1035B-00-A4 53474-03
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (2.25)
0 - 300 30 - 300 4.96
1" 1" G1036B-00-A4 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (2.25)
0 - 300 30 - 300 4.96
1-1/4" G1037B-00-A4 53475-01
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (2.25)

4-Port/2-Position (4 way) Inline

0 - 300 30 - 300 1.81
1/4" F1012C-00-A1 53473-05
CYL2 CYL1 (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (0.82)
1/4"
0 - 300 30 - 300 1.81
3/8" F1013C-00-A1 53473-05
IN EXH (0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (.82)
0 - 300 30 - 300 2.30
3/8" F1023C-00-A1 53474-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.04)
1/2"
0 - 300 30 - 300 2.30
1/2" F1024C-00-A1 53474-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.04)
0 - 300 30 - 300 2.30
3/4" F1025C-00-A1 53474-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.79)
0 - 300 30 - 300 5.42
3/4" F1035C-00-A1 53475-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (2.46)
1"
0 - 300 30 - 300 5.42
1" F1036C-00-A1 53475-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (2.46)
0 - 300 30 - 300 5.42
1-1/4" F1037C-00-A1 53475-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (2.46)
4-Port/2-Position (4 way) Subbase

0 - 300 30 - 300 3.96
1/2" 1/2" F2214C-00-A1 53474-06
CYL2 CYL1
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (1.80)
0 - 300 30 - 300 9.62
IN EXH 1" 1" F2226C-00-A1 53475-06
(0 - 20.7) (2.1 - 20.7) (4.37)
* Thread: Insert A for Inline BSPP; 1 for Inline PTF; or B for Inline ISO Rc; 4 for Subbase valve with subbase, BSPP; 5 for Subbase valve without subbase, BSPP; 2 for Subbase valve
with subbase, PTF; 3 for Subbase valve without subbase, PTF; 6 for Subbase valve with subbase, ISO Rc; or 7 for Subbase valve without subbase, ISO Rc.

Air Pilot Operated Inline & Subbase Valves
Options Information
For optional features, note the valve model number that comes closest to the desired valve from the preceding order table. Change the model
number as shown in the following diagram to obtain the desired option. For example: the ordering table on VAL-12-21 shows D1022C-00-A1, a
3-port/2-position single air pilot operated valve with spring return. To use this valve with a twin operator, change the last two digits to A4, as shown
below.
Position in Model Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Example model number is a 3-port/2-position (3-way) normally
D 1 0 2 2 C 0 0 A 1 closed valve with a single air operator, and spring return.
Operator Options Weight

7 Indicator Pin (Basic 1/2" valve)**
lbs. (kg)
8 Indicator Pin (Basic 1" valve)** AA A1 Operator with 0.29 (0.13)
BSPP Threads
A6 Momentary Signal 0.38 (0.17)
F Bleed Operation†† Operator (PTF Threads)†
K Momentary Signal Operation† AF Momentary Signal 0.38 (0.17)
Operator (BSPP Threads)†*
J Vacuum Service§ A4 Twin Operator 0.59 (0.27)
(PTF Threads Only)§§
Vacuum Service§
For on-off application of vacuum, use a
normally closed 2-port/2-position (2-way) valve. † MOMENTARY SIGNAL OPERATOR : Used when it is desirable
When the valve is actuated, vacuum will be to control the valve with 2 alternately applied
applied to the outlet port.
momentary signals of 0.2 second minimum duration
For selecting alternately between vacuum and (first signal shifts and hold the poppet; the second
pressure, use a normally open 3-port/2-position
(3-way) valve. Connect the vacuum to the exhaust allows the poppet to return to its normal position).
port and pressure to the inlet port. When the Available only on 3-port/2-position normally closed
valve is actuated, vacuum will be applied to the valves and on 4-port/2 position (4-way) valves. Be sure
outlet port. to change the 6th, 9th and 10th positions of the model
For selecting alternately between vacuum and number.
vent, use a normally open 3-port/2-position (3-
way) valve. Connect the vacuum to the exhaust §§ TWIN OPERATOR : Allows independent operation of each
port and vent the inlet port. When the valve is valve element. Available only on 4-port/2-position
actuated, vacuum will be applied to the outlet (4-way) valves.
port.
In addition, a 4-port/2-position (4-way) valve * REPAIR KIT : Available for A6 operator. Kit contains all
can be connected the same way as 3-port/2- elastomers necessary to service one operator body. To
position (3-way) valves for selecting alternately order, request: 53476-01.
between vacuum and pressure or vacuum and
vent. That is, connect the vacuum to the exhaust
port and pressure or vent to the inlet port. When
the valve is actuated, the cylinder ports (outlets)
will be alternately switched between vacuum and
pressure or vacuum and vent.
To calculate the weight of a valve and optional operator take the weight given for the relevant valve from the ordering tables, subtract either 0.29 lbs (0.13 kg) for an
A1 operator and add the weight given above for the appropriate optional operator.
For example: For D1022C-00-A1 has a listed weight of 1.79 lbs (0.81 kg ). To convert this to a Momentary Signal Operator,
i.e. D1022C-00-A6 ➔ 0.81 - 0.13 + 0.17 = 0.85 kg (1.87 lbs.)

All Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Valve Body Dimensions – 2-Port/2-Position Inline Bodies
Basic 1/2-Inch Body A101*C & B101*C

(2-Port/2 Position Pilot Operated Valve)
1.00 (25.4)
2.13 (54.1)
1.44 (36.6)
1.44 (36.6)
.84 (21.3)
3.06 (77.7)
2.90 (73.7)
1.66 (42.2)
2.50 (63.5)
1.56 (39.6)
INLET PORT EXH PORT
.28 (7.1)
Dia. (2 plcs) 1.50 (38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
Basic 1-Inch Body A102*C & B102*C

OPERATOR
.16 (4.1)
1.89 (48.0)
3.14 (79.8)
3.14 (79.8)
4.10 (104.1)
3.31 (84.1)
5.20 (132.1)
2.38 (60.5)
2.06 (52.3)
EXH
PORT
2.31 (58.7)
4.62 (117.3)
1.13 (28.7)
INLET PORT 2.88 (73.2)
Basic 2-Inch Body A103*C & C104*C

5.03 (127.8)
2.52 (64.0)
4.31 (109.5)
4.31 (109.5)
8.05 (204.5)
EXH
PORT
INLET PORT
3.16 (80.2)
6.31 (160.3)

3-Port/2-Position Inline Bodies
Basic 1/4-Inch Body D101*B & E101*B (3-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)
3.06 (77.7)
1.13 (28.7)
.28 (7.1) TYP
.53 (13.5) .53 (13.5)
2.50 (63.5)
.88 (22.4)
1.56 (39.6)
2.69 (68.3)
3.00 (76.2)
3.56 (90.4)
3/8", 3/8"
1/4", 3/8"
1/4", 3/8"
5.6 (.22) Dia. (2 Plcs)
Basic 1/2 - Inch Body D102*C & E102*C (3-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)
1.56 (39.6)
3.06 (77.7)
1.50 (38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
1.03 (26.2) 2.00 (50.8)
1.00 (25.4) 2.31 (58.7)
.28 (7.1) Dia.(1 Plcs)
1.03 (26.2)
4.15 (105.4) (Indicator)
1.94 (49.3)
2.75 (69.8)
3.89 (98.8( (Std)
EXH
OUT
.87 (22.1)
IN 1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 3/4"

1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
Basic 1 - Inch Body D103*C, D104*C, E103*C & E104*C (3-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)
2.06 (52.3)
4.06 (103.1)
2.00 (50.8)
4.00 (101.6)
1.38 (34.9) 2.75 (69.9)

3.13 (79.5)
1.90 (48.3)
2.02 (51.3)
.41 (10.4) Dia. (2 Plcs)
3.40 (86.4)
6.20 (157.5) (Indicator)
4.65 (118.1)
16.6 (156.6) (Std)
EXH
1.25 (31.8)
OUT
3/4", 1", 1-1/4"
IN
3/4", 1", 1-1/4"

1", 1-1/4", 1-1/4"

3-Port/2-Position Multi-Directional Inline Bodies
Basic 1/2 - Inch Body C101*C, C102*C, C105*C & C106*C
(3-Port/2-Position Multi-Directional Operated Valve)
2.13 (54.1)
.84 (21.3)
1.00 (25.4)
1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
1.44 (36.6)
1.44 (36.6)
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" Ports
3.06 (77.7)
1.66 (42.2)
3.20 (81.3)
2.50 (63.5)
A B 1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
1.56 (39.6)
1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
C
.28 (7.1)
Dia. (2 plcs)
1.50 (38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
Basic 1 - Inch Body C103*C & C103*H

OPERATOR
.16 (4.1)
1.77 (45.0)
3/4", 1", 1-1/4"

3.14 (79.8)
3.14 (79.8)
4.10 (104.1)
3.31 (84.1)
5.49 (139.4)
2.38 (60.5)
2.06 (52.3)
3/4", 1", 1-1/4"
3/4", 1", 1-1/4"
2.31 (58.7)
4.62 (117.3)
1.13 (28.7)
2.88 (73.2)
Basic 2 - Inch Body C104*C, C108*C & C104*H

5.03 (127.8)
2.52 (64.0)
4.31 (109.5)
4.31 (109.5)
9.35 (237.5)
1-1/2", 2"
1-1/2", 2"
1-1/2", 2"
3.16 (80.2)
6.31 (160.3)

Valve Body Dimensions – 4-Port/2-Position Inline Bodies
Basic 1/4 - Inch Body F101*C (4-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)

.69 (17.5)
1.75 (44.5) .46 (11.7)
.59 (15.0)
1.22 (31.1)
1.15 (29.1)
3/8", 3/8"
1/4", 3/8"
1.84 (46.7)
EX
3.13 (79.5)
2.73 (69.3)
1.56 (39.6)
1/4", 3/8"
CYL 1 CYL 2 IN
1.50 (38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
.66 (16.8) .84 (21.3)
Basic 1/2 - Inch Body F102*C (4-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)
3.75 (95.3) .34 (8.6) Dia. (2 plcs)

.38 (9.7) TYP
2.00 (50.8)
.88 (22.4)
1.94 (49.3)
2.75 (69.9)
1.69 (42.9)
3/8", 1/2", 3/4"

EX
.75 (19.1)
3.94 (100.1)
A
CYL 1 CYL 2 IN
1.50 (38.1) .88 (22.4) 1.63 (41.4)

3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
3.00 (76.2) 1.75 (44.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1/2", 3/4", 3/4"
Basic 1 - Inch Body F103*C (4-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)
4.50 (114.3) 2.50 (63.5)

1.25 (31.8)
.38 (9.7) TYP
2.25 (57.2)
.41 (10.4)
2.24 (56.9)
2.50 (63.5)
Dia. (2 plcs)
3.49 (88.6)
3.49 (88.6)
EXH
5.00 (127.0)
1.44 (36.6)
6.23 (158.2)
2.50 (63.5)
CYL 1 CYL 2
4.00 (101.6) IN
44.5 (1.75)
3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/4"
88.9 (3.50) 3/4", 1", 1-1/4"
TOP VIEW

Valve Body Dimensions – 4-Port/2-Position Subbase Bodies
Basic 1/2 - Inch Body F2214C (4-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)

VALVE BODY
3.94 (100.1) 1.63 (41.4) 1.31(33.3)
3/4", 3/4"
CYL 2 CYL 1
1.56 (39.6)
1/2", 1/2"
4.04 (102.6)
3.50 (88.9)
.81 (20.6)
4.95 (125.7)
1.75 (44.5)
.35 (8.9) TYP
.34 (8.6) DIA (2 Plcs)
EXH IN
.27 (6.9) TYP
1.56 (39.6) 1.44 (36.6)
.28 (7.1) DIA (6 plcs)
4.20 (106.7)
3.38 (85.9)
.25 (6.4) TYP
3.03 (77.0)
.41 (10.4 )TYP

1.53 (38.9)
4.25 (107.9)
.63 (16.0) TYP

.53 (13.5) .81 (20.6)
1/2", 3/4"
1.31 (33.3) 1.63 (41.1) 1.31 (33.3)
Basic 1- Inch Body F2226C (4-Port/2-Position Pilot Operated Valve)

VALVE BODY
6.23 (158.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.5(38.1)
CYL 2 CYL 1
2.39 (60.7)
1-1/4", 1"
5.25 (133.4)
6.09 (154.7)
1.06 (26.9) 6.75 (171.5)

2.63 (66.7)
.38 (9.7) TYP .41 (10.4) DIA (4 Plcs)
EXH IN
.42(10.7) TYP
2.00 (50.8) 2.31(58.7)
.34 (8.6) DIA (6 Plcs)
5.25 (133.4)
6.06 (153.9)
.34 (8.6) TYP

3.59 (91.2)
1.84 (46.7)
1.06 (26.9) .41 (10.4) TYP
.53(13.5)
6.00 (152.4)
.50 (12.7)
†Gasket, .03 (.8) thick, included in dimensions.

1"
1.50 (38.1) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1)

Air Pilot Operator Dimensions
A1 & AA Single A4 Twin
1/4"
3.00 (76)
3.00 (76)
1/4" 0.67 (17)* 18 (.69)
0.67 (17)*
* Gasket, 0.03 (0.8) thick included in dimension.

01 EEX D-6 28-09-2007 15:21 Pagina 32
C C A . . . E Series/Serie
TECHNICAL FEATURES CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE
CCA…E series aluminium alloy enclosures Le custodie serie e CCA…E costruite in

are used both as junction boxes with or lega di alluminio vengono impiegate sia
without terminals and to install other elec- come scatole di derivazione con o senza
trical equipment such as switches, indica- morsetti, sia per l’installazione di altri appa-
tors, section switches, remote control swit- rati elettrici come interruttori, segnalatori,
Ex d
ches and transformers. Enclosures can be sezionatori, teleruttori, trasformatori, ecc...

drilled and threaded according to custo- Le custodie possono essere forate e filetta-
mer is specifications. The outer flange te su specifica del cliente. Il tipo di realiz-
makes it easier to install components insi- zazione, a flangia esterna, facilita l’inseri-
de the enclosure. mento dei componenti all’interno.
ACCESSORIES ACCESSORI
• Internal mounting frames • Telaio interno

• Internal anti-condensate coating • Verniciatura interna anticondensa
• Air and drain valve • Valvola di sfiato e drenaggio
CONFORMITY TO STANDARDS CONFORMITA’ ALLE NORMATIVE STANDARD
Explosion-proof enclosures are manufactured according to CENELEC Custodie a prova di esplosione costruite in accordo alle normative
standards EN 60079-1: 2004, EN 60079-0: 2006, EN 60079-11: 2007, CENELEC EN 60079-1: 2004, EN 60079-0: 2006, EN 60079-11: 2007,
EN 61241-1: 2004, EN 61241-0: 2006 and EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE EN 61241-1: 2004, EN 61241-0: 2006 ed alla DIRETTIVA EUROPEA
94/9/EC: 1994. 94/9/EC: 1994.
INSTALLATION AREAS LUOGHI DI INSTALLAZIONE
These enclosures are designed for use indoors or outdoors in poten- Le custodie vengono usate in luoghi pericolosi all’interno o all’ester-
tially hazardous atmospheres due to the presence of explosive or no dove esiste pericolo di esplosioni o combustioni di gas e di pol-
combustible gases and dusts. They are installed in the following veri combustibili, vengono installate nelle seguenti zone: zona 1,
zones: zone 1, zone 2, zone 21, zone 22. zona 2, zona 21, zona 22.
APPLICATIONS APPLICAZIONI
Explosive atmospheres Atmosfera esplosiva
- chemical, petrochemical and pharmaceutical industries; - industrie chimiche, petrolchimiche e farmaceutiche;
- onshore and offshore ship industries; - onshore ed offshore, navale;
- areas at risks of explosion and fire; - luoghi con pericolo di esplosione ed incendio;
- OIL and GAS industries. - industrie OIL and GAS.
CERTIFICATION AND USE CERTIFICAZIONI ED ESECUZIONE
EMPTY ENCLOSURES CUSTODIE VUOTE
CE type test certification: CESI 01 ATEX 034U Certificato di esame CE del tipo: CESI 01 ATEX 034U
Australian Certification: AVAILABLE Certificato Australiano: DISPONIBILE
GOST R (Russia) Certification: AVAILABLE Certificato GOST R (Russia): DISPONIBILE
GOST K (Kazakhstan) Certification: AVAILABLE Certificato GOST K (Kazhakistan): DISPONIBILE
0722 Execution: II 2 GD Ex d IIC Ex tD A21 IP66 Esecuzione 0722: II 2 GD Ex d IIC Ex tD A21 IP66
Ambient Temperature: -20 +40°C Temperatura ambiente: -20 ÷ +40°C
-20 +55°C -20 ÷ +55°C
ENCLOSURES WITH TERMINALS CUSTODIE CON MORSETTI
CE type test certification: CESI 01 ATEX 035 Certificato di esame CE del tipo: CESI 01 ATEX 035
32 Explosion Proof Electrical Fittings Safety Equipment for Hazardous Areas

01 EEX D-6 28-09-2007 15:21 Pagina 33
0722 Execution: II 2 GD Ex d IIC T6/T5 Ex tD A21 IP66 Esecuzione 0722: II 2 GD Ex d IIC T6/T5 Ex tD A21 IP66
Maximum surface temperature with 2G terminal strips: Massima temperatura superficiale con morsettiere di categoria 2G:
• T6 for ambient temperature -20 +40°C • T6 per temperatura ambiente -20 ÷ +40°C
Ex d
Maximum surface temperature with 2D terminal strips: Massima temperatura superficiale con morsettiere di categoria 2D:
• T85°C for ambient temperature -20 +40°C • T85°C per temperatura ambiente -20 ÷ +40°C
ELECTRICAL FEATURES CARATTERISTICHE ELETTRICHE
Rated voltage: 24 800V Tensione nominale: 24 ÷ 800V

Rated frequency: 50 60Hz Frequenza nominale: 50 ÷ 60Hz
MODULAR TERMINALS MORSETTI COMPONIBILI

Terminal section: 2.5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 35; 70; 95; 120; 185; 240 mm 2
Sezione morsetti: 2,5; 4; 6; 10; 16; 25; 35; 70; 95; 120; 185; 240 mm2
Rated current: 12.5 400A Corrente nominale: 12,5 ÷ 400A
Maximum current density: 1.65 7A/mm2 Massima densità di corrente: 1,65 ÷ 7A/mm2
TERMINAL ENCLOSURES MORSETTIERE

Terminal section: 3x16; 4x16; 3x25; 4x25; 3x40; 4x40; 3x70; 4x70; Sezione morsetti: 3x16; 4x16; 3x25; 4x25; 3x40; 4x40; 3x70; 4x70;
3x125; 4x125; 3x200; 4x200; 3x315 mm2 3x125; 4x125; 3x200; 4x200; 3x315 mm2
Rated current: 48 252A Corrente nominale: 48 ÷ 252A
Maximum current density: 0.8 3A/mm 2
Massima densità di corrente: 0,8 ÷ 3A/mm2
ENCLOSURES DESIGNED FOR CONTROL, CUSTODIE PER UNITÀ DI COMANDO,

MONITORING AND SIGNALLING UNITS CONTROLLO E SEGNALAZIONE
IECEx Certificate: AVAILABLE Certificato IECEx: DISPONIBILE
0722 Execution: II 2 GD Ex d IIC T6/T5 Ex tD A21 IP66 Esecuzione 0722: II 2 GD Ex d IIC T6/T5 Ex tD A21 IP66
Rated voltage: 24 ÷ 1000V 12 250Vc.c. Tensione nominale: 24 ÷ 1000V 2 ÷ 250Vc.c.

Rated Frequency: 50 60Hz - Frequenza nominale: 50 ÷ 60Hz -
Maximum current in contacts: 400 A 400 A Corrente massima nei contatti: 400 A 400 A
Maximum lamp power: 5W for amb. temp. -20 +40°C Potenza massima per le lampade: 5W per temp. amb. -20 ÷ +40°C
3W for amb. temp. -20 +55°C 3W per temp. amb. -20 ÷ +55°C
Temperature classes for 2G units: Classi di temperatura per le unità categoria 2G:
T6 or T5 depending on enclosure size, ambient temperature and T6 o T5 in funzione delle dimensioni della custodia, della tempera-
dissipated power inside the enclosure. tura ambiente e della potenza dissipata all’interno della custodia.
Maximum surface temperature of enclosure for 2D units: Max. temperatura superficiale della custodia per le unità categoria 2D:
T85°C T100°C depending on enclosure size, ambient temperature T85°C ÷ T100°C in funzione delle dimensioni della custodia, della
and dissipated power inside the enclosure. temperatura ambiente e della potenza dissipata all’interno della
custodia.
33
01 EEX D-6 28-09-2007 15:21 Pagina 34
ENCLOSURES USED AS CONTROL UNITS AND, CUSTODIE CON FUNZIONE DI UNITÀ DI COMANDO
MONITORING OF INTERFACE UNITS E CONTROLLO DI UNITÀ DI INTERFACCIA
Ex d

0722 Execution: II 2(1) G Ex d [ia] IIC T6/T5 Esecuzione 0722: II 2(1) G Ex d [ia] IIC T6/T5
II 2(1) GD Ex d [ia] IIC Ex tD A21 IP66 II 2(1) GD Ex d [ia] IIC Ex tD A21 IP66
Protection against flammable gases Protezione contro gas infiammabili
Execution: Ex d [ia] IIC T6 Esecuzione: Ex d [ia] IIC T6

for interface units per unità d’interfaccia
Ex d [ia] IIC T6 or T5 Ex d [ia] IIC T6 or T5
for control, monitoring units per unità di comando e controllo
Protection: IP-66 Grado di protezione: IP-66
Ambient Temperature: -20 +40°C Temperatura ambiente: -20 ÷ +40°C
-20 +55°C -20 ÷ +55°C
Temperature class: Classe di temperatura:
• T6 for ambient temperature -20°C +40°C • T6 per temperatura ambiente -20°C +40°C
• T5 for ambient temperature -20°C +55°C • T5 per temperatura ambiente -20°C+55°C
Max Temperature for protection against “D” or “GD” dusts: Massima temperatura per protezioni contro polveri “D” o “GD”:
• T85°C for temperature class T6 • T85°C per temperatura classe T6
• T100°C for temperature class T5 • T100°C per temperatura classe T5
Rated voltage: 24 1000 V c.a. 12 250 V c.c. Tensione nominale: 24 ÷ 1000 V c.a. 12 ÷ 250 V c.c.
Rated Frequency: 50 60 Hz - Frequenza nominale: 50 ÷ 60 Hz -
Max. current in contacts and fuses: 400 A 400A Corrente max. nei contatti e fusibili: 400 A 400A
Temperature class for category II 2(1)G and II 2(1)GD: Classe di temperatura per categoria II 2(1)G e II 2(1)GD:
Maximum surface temperature for category II 2(1) GD: Massima temperatura superficiale per categoria II 2(1) GD:
Maximum dissipated power Potenza massima dissipabile

The maximum dissipated power inside the enclosure and the maxi- La massima potenza dissipabile all’interno della custodia e la massima
mum current in the contacts or fuses depend on the enclosure corrente nei contatti o nei fusibili sono in funzione delle dimensioni della
dimensions, the temperature class (or the max. surface temperature custodia, della classe di temperatura (o della massima temperatura
for 2D units) and the ambient temperature. superficiale per le unità di categoria 2D) e della temperatura ambiente.
HEALTH AND SAFETY SALUTE E SICUREZZA
All electrical equipment must always be installed and maintained in Nel mondo tutti gli equipaggiamenti elettrici devono essere installati
accordance with your country’s regulations concerning health and e mantenuti secondo le disposizioni legislative in materia di sicurez-
safety at work, anyway in compliance with CortemGroup standards. za e salute sul lavoro in vigore nello Stato, sempre e comunque in
The user is responsible for choosing, installing, operating and main- accordo agli standard CortemGroup.
taining electrical equipment in compliance with the related laws and È responsabilità dell’utilizzatore scegliere, installare, operare e man-
regulations in force. Each product is supplied with instructions for tenere gli equipaggiamenti elettrici in conformità alla relativa legisla-
use, safety and maintenance manual. zione e alle norme in uso, inoltre un libretto per le istruzioni di sicu-
rezza, uso e manutenzione è posto all’interno di ogni custodia.
34
01 EEX D-6 28-09-2007 15:21 Pagina 35
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES - CARATTERISTICHE COSTRUTTIVE
Ex d
Internal mounting frame - Telai interni
Junction box
Cassette
Note: n° 2 lugs for CCA-OE/01E - Nota: n° 2 piedini per CCA-OE/01E.
ENCLOSURE SIZE - DIMENSIONI (mm)

TYPE
EXTERNAL INTERNAL FIXING WEIGHT
TIPO ESTERNE INTERNE FISSAGGIO PESO
CUSTODIA (Kg)
A B ØB1 C a b c Ød1 s E F ØG
CCA-0E 128 128 146 125 104 104 103 130x2 12 111 142 9 1,850
CCA-01E 145 145 160 128 121 121 104 150x2 12 128 165 9 2,800
CCA-02E 195 195 212 150 171 171 120 200x3 12 175 175 10 5,600
CCA-03E 240 240 260 210 216 216 177 250x3 12 213 213 12 9,100
CCA-04E 385 385 410 275 353 353 206 390x3 16 339 339 14 26,700
STRUCTURE COSTRUZIONE
The CCA…E series enclosures are made of UNI-4514, UNI-3019, Le custodie serie CCA…E sono costruite in lega di alluminio UNI-
UNI-3051 or UNI-3599 copper-free aluminium alloy with standard 4514, UNI-3019, UNI-3051 o UNI-3599 esente da rame. Standard
RAL 7035 epoxy coating. verniciatura epossidica RAL 7035.
The internal/external earth screws are made of AISI 604 UNI 7323 Le viti di collegamento di terra interna/esterna sono in acciaio inox
stainless steel AISI 604 UNI 7323.
35
01 EEX D-6 28-09-2007 15:21 Pagina 36
DATA TO DRILL THE BODY - DATI PER LA FORATURA DEL CORPO

Ex d
Threading - Filettatura
DRILLING OF THE BODY - FORATURA DEL CORPO

ENCLOSURE ONE SIDE - UN LATO
TYPE MAX. QUANTITY PER HOLE TYPE
AREA QUANTITÀ MAX. PER TIPO DI FORO
TIPO
mm
CUSTODIA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
CCA-0E 97x65 6 4 2 1 1 1 - - -
CCA-01E 108x65 6 4 3 2 1 1 - - -
CCA-02E 135x70 8 6 3 2 2 2 - - -
CCA-03E 155x115 12 12 6 6 4 2 1 1 1
CCA-04E 243x140 28 22 15 12 8 6 3 2 2
36
01 EEX D-6 28-09-2007 15:21 Pagina 37
TYPICAL TERMINAL CONFIGURATION - TIPICA CONFIGURAZIONE DEI MORSETTI
Ex d
Notes: Distances are indicative only and should be evaluated case by case.
Note: Le distanze sono indicative, verranno dunque valutate di volta in volta.
ENCLOSURE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF INSTALLABLE TERMINALS - NUMERO MASSIMO DI MORSETTI INSTALLABILI

TYPE
TIPO CUSTODIA 2,5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2 70 mm2 120 mm2 185 mm2
CCA-0E 13 12 8 7 6 - - - -
CCA-01E 17 14 11 9 7 5 - - -
CCA-02E 2x22 2x19 2x15 2x12 2x10 6 - - -
CCA-03E 2x32 2x27 2x22 2x17 2x14 8 - - -
CCA-04E 3x40 3x30 2x28 2x23 2x18 12 10 6 4
E.g. 2x22 = 2 rows of 22 terminals (tot. 44 terminals). The max. number of standard terminals refers to CABUR terminals
Es. 2x22 = 2 file da 22 morsetti (tot. 44 morsetti). Il numero massimo di morsetti standard è riferito per morsetti CABUR.
In our website www.cortemgroup.com a new and useful software is available. It is conceived to help our customers to select the right junction
box, according to the number of holes, the number of terminals and the proper protection degree required for the installation.
Cortemgroup offre alla clientela sul proprio sito www.cortemgroup.com un software dedicato alla scelta della custodia da utilizzare, in base ai
fori necessari, i morsetti da utilizzare e il grado di protezione richiesto per l'intallazione.
37

Instrucciones de Mantto

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instrucciones de Mantto

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISTRUZIONI PER IL MONTAGGIO E LA MANUTENZIONE

ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone DT-'N'

TITLE DOCUMENT CODE REVISION

305 BOOSTER FISHER Mod. 2625 62.3:2625

VALVOLA PNEUM. A 3 VIE

TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION

Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'

5 General revision ESP Bucci F. Stanzione V. 30/04/10

3 Added packing type 7 ESP/MP Bucci F. ITEM

2 General revision ESP Stanzione V. Bucci F. 28/02/08

3 Added packing type 7

2. STANDARD PACKING ASSEMBLY (TYPE 1-2-2A-3-4-7)

3 Added packing type 7

STANDARD PACKING TYPE 1-2-2A-3-4

3 Added packing type 7

STANDARD PACKING TYPE 7

3 Added packing type 7

Type 1 Type 2 Type 2A

Type 3 Type 4 Type 7

3 Added packing type 7

3. GRF PACKING MAINTENANCE (TYPE 5)

Before any operation, make sure that the valve is depressurized.

3 Added packing type 7

Design STEM DIAMETERS (mm)

3 Added packing type 7

4. GIJ PACKING MAINTENANCE (TYPE 6)

Before any operation, make sure that the valve is depressurized.

3 Added packing type 7

Grease Pressure for GIJ packing (TYPE 6)

3 Added packing type 7

Design STEM DIAMETERS (mm)

3 Added packing type 7

5. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS (Ref. Figs. Type 1-2-2A-3-4-7)

Mark Name Quantity

18 Sealing rings 1 series

3 Added packing type 7

Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'

TYPE 11-13-18-18L-24 direct (air close action)

ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

3 General revision ESP Bucci F. Stanzione V. 30/04/10 ITEM

2 Additions to ATEX Prescription DPF/RR Bucci F. Giove F. 12/02/07 NOM02004/4

Atex Prescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4

Fig. 1 – Actuator with “air close” action (TYPE 11-13-18)

3 General revision ITEM

2 Additions to ATEX Prescription

REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 2 / 3

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

3 General revision ITEM

2 Additions to ATEX Prescription

REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 3 / 4

GENERAL SAFETY RULES

3 General revision ITEM

2 Additions to ATEX Prescription

REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 4 / 5

2. Clearances between moving parts, assigned by Nuovo Pignone, are

6. Access to the actuators and their accessories shall be limited to authorized

3 General revision ITEM

2 Additions to ATEX Prescription

REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 5 / 6

3 General revision ITEM

2 Additions to ATEX Prescription

REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 6 / 7

24. The installer/user is responsible for removing risks due to: